SMART3 MN Colorimeter Operators Manual
User Manual: Pdf smart3 colorimeter operators manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 289
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
For Sales & Service Contact 2650 E. 40th Ave. • Denver, CO 80205 Phone 303-320-4764 • Fax 303-322-7242 1-800-833-7958 www.geotechenv.com 1910-MN 2.28.11 CONTENTS GENERAL INFORMATION Packaging & Delivery ...................................................................................... 2 General Precautions ...................................................................................... 2 Safety Precautions ......................................................................................... 2 Limits of Liability ............................................................................................. 3 Warranty ......................................................................................................... 3 Specifications ................................................................................................ 4 Statistical and Technical Definitions ............................................................... 5 Contents and Accessories ............................................................................. 6 EPA Compliance ............................................................................................ 7 CE Compliance .............................................................................................. 7 IP 67 Certification ............................................................................................ 7 CHEMICAL TESTING Water Sampling for Chemical Analysis ......................................................... 8 Filtration ......................................................................................................... 9 An Introduction to Colorimetric Analysis ..................................................... 10 Reagent Blank ............................................................................................. 11 Colorimeter Tubes ....................................................................................... 11 Meter Care .................................................................................................... 11 Selecting an Appropriate Wavelength ........................................................ 11 Calibration .................................................................................................... 12 Calibration Curves ....................................................................................... 12 Standard Additions ...................................................................................... 15 Sample Dilution & Volumetric Measurements ............................................ 16 Interferences ................................................................................................ 17 Stray Light Interference ............................................................................... 17 OPERATION OF THE SMART 3 COLORIMETER Overview ...................................................................................................... 18 Components ................................................................................................ 19 GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES The Keypad ................................................................................................. Sample Holders ............................................................................................ The Display & the Menus ............................................................................ Looping Menus............................................................................................. 20 20 21 23 TESTING Testing Menu ............................................................................................... 24 Test Sequences ........................................................................................... 25 General Testing Procedures ........................................................................ Testing With LaMotte Pre-Programmed Tests ............................................. Calibrating LaMotte Pre-Progammed Tests ................................................. Measuring in the Absorbance Mode ............................................................ 25 26 28 32 EDITING MENU Editing a Sequence ..................................................................................... 35 Adding a Test ............................................................................................... 37 Deleting a Test ............................................................................................... 39 Edit User Tests ............................................................................................. 41 Naming the Test ........................................................................................... 43 Selecting the Vial and Wavelength ............................................................. 46 Entering a Two Point Calibration ................................................................. 47 Entering a Multiple Point Calibration ............................................................. 51 Selecting the Numerical Format of the Result ............................................. 54 Selecting Units of Concentration ................................................................. 55 Setting the Clock .......................................................................................... 56 Logging Data ................................................................................................ 57 Factory Setup ............................................................................................... 58 Setting the Power Save Function ................................................................. 58 Setting the Backlight Time ............................................................................ 60 Selecting a Language ................................................................................... 61 COMPUTER CONNECTION PC Link .......................................................................................................... 63 Output .......................................................................................................... 63 Computer Connection .................................................................................. 63 SMARTLink 3 ................................................................................................. 63 BATTERY Battery/AC Operation .................................................................................... 64 Battery Replacement ..................................................................................... 64 MAINTENANCE Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 65 Repairs.......................................................................................................... 65 Meter Disposal.............................................................................................. 65 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages ............................................................................................ 66 Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................. 67 SMART3 COLORIMETER TEST PROCEDURES APPENDIX GENERAL INFORMATION PACKAGING & DELIVERY Experienced packaging personnel at LaMotte Company assure adequate protection against normal hazards encountered in transportation of shipments. After the product leaves the manufacturer, all responsibility for its safe delivery is assured by the transportation company. Damage claims must be filed immediately with the transportation company to receive compensation for damaged goods. Should it be necessary to return the instrument for repair or servicing, pack instrument carefully in a suitable container with adequate packing material. A return authorization number must be obtained from LaMotte Company by calling 1-800-344-3100 or emailing tech@lamotte.com. Attach a letter with the authorization number to the shipping carton which describes the kind of trouble experienced. This valuable information will enable the service department to make the required repairs more efficiently. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Before attempting to set up or operate this instrument it is important to read the instruction manual. Failure to do so could result in personal injury or damage to the equipment. The SMART3 Colorimeter should not be stored or used in a wet or corrosive environment. Care should be taken to prevent water or reagent chemicals from wet colorimeter tubes from entering the colorimeter chamber. NEVER PUT WET TUBES IN COLORIMETER. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read the labels on all LaMotte reagent containers prior to use. Some containers include precautionary notices and first aid information. Certain reagents are considered hazardous substances and are designated with a * in the instruction manual. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) can be found at www.lamotte. com. Read the MSDS before using these reagents. Additional emergency information for all LaMotte reagents is available 24 hours a day from the Poison Control Center listed in the front of the phone book or by contacting the 24 hour emergency line for ChemTel 1-800-255-3924 (USA, Canada, Puerto Rico); locations outside the North American Continent 813-248-0585 (call collect). Be prepared to supply the name and four-digit LaMotte code number found on the container label or at the top of the MSDS or in the contents list of the procedure. LaMotte reagents are registered with a computerized poison control information system available to all local poison control centers. Keep equipment and reagent chemicals out of the reach of young children. 2 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 LIMITS OF LIABILITY Under no circumstances shall LaMotte Company be liable for loss of life, property, profits, or other damages incurred through the use or misuse of its products. WARRANTY LaMotte Company warrants this instrument to be free of defects in parts and workmanship for 2 years from the date of shipment. If it should become necessary to return the instrument for service during or beyond the warranty period, contact our Technical Service Department at 1-800-344-3100 or tech@lamotte.com for a return authorization number or visit www.lamotte. com for troubleshooting help. The sender is responsible for shipping charges, freight, insurance and proper packaging to prevent damage in transit. This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from action of the user such as misuse, improper wiring, operation outside of specification, improper maintenance or repair, or unauthorized modification. LaMotte Company specifically disclaims any implied warranties or merchantability or fitness for a specific purpose and will not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages. LaMotte Company’s total liability is limited to repair or replacement of the product. The warranty set forth above is inclusive and no other warranty, whether written or oral, is expressed or implied. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 3 SPECIFICATIONS INSTRUMENT TYPE: Colorimeter Readout 160 x 100 backlit LCD, 20 x 6 line graphical display Wavelengths 428 nm, 525 nm, 568 nm, 635 nm Wavelength Accuracy ±2% FS Readable Resolution Determined by reagent system Wavelength Bandwidth 10 nm typical Photometric Range –2 to +2 AU Photometric Precision ± 0.001 AU at 1.0 AU Photometric Accuracy ±0.005 AU at 1.0 AU Sample Chamber Accepts 25 mm diameter flat-bottomed test tubes, 10 mm square cuvettes, 16 mm COD test tubes Light Sources 4 LEDs Detectors 4 silicon photodiodes with integrated interference filters Modes Pre-programmed tests, absorbance, %T Pre-Programmed Tests YES, with automatic wavelength selection User Defined Tests Up to 25 user tests can be input Languages English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Italian, Chinese, Japanese USB Port Mini B Power Requirements USB wall adapter, USB computer connection or lithium ion rechargeable battery Battery Charge Life: Approximately 380 tests with backlight on to 1000 tests with backlight off. (Signal averaging disabled). Battery Life: Approximately 500 charges. Electrical Rating Provided on nameplate label Data Logger 500 test results stored for download to a PC Waterproof IP67 with USB port plug in place Dimensions (LxWxH) 3.5 x 7.5 x 2.5 inches, 8.84 x 19.05 x 6.35 cm Weight 13 oz, 362 g (meter only) 4 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 STATISTICAL & TECHNICAL DEFINITIONS RELATED TO PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Method Detection Limit (MDL): “The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the analyte concentration is greater than zero and is determined from analysis of a sample in a given matrix containing the analyte.”1 Note that, “As Dr. William Horwitz once stated, ‘In almost all cases when dealing with a limit of detection or limit of determination, the primary purpose of determining that limit is to stay away from it.’”2 Accuracy: Accuracy is the nearness of a measurement to the accepted or true value.3 The accuracy can be expressed as a range, about the true value, in which a measurement occurs (i.e. ±0.5 ppm). It can also be expressed as the % recovery of a known amount of analyte in a determination of the analyte (i.e. 103.5 %). Resolution: Resolution is the smallest discernible difference between any two measurements that can be made.4 For meters this is usually how many decimal places are displayed. (i.e. 0.01). Note that the resolution many change with concentration or range. In some cases the resolution may be less than the smallest interval, if it is possible to make a reading that falls between calibration marks. A word of caution, that resolution has very little relationship to accuracy or precision. The resolution will always be less than the accuracy or precision but it is not a statistical measure of how well a method of analysis works. The resolution can be very, very good and the accuracy and precision can be very bad! This is not a useful measure of the performance of a test method. Repeatability: Repeatability is the within-run precision.5 A run is a single data set, from set up to clean up. Generally, one run occurs on one day. However, for meter calibrations, a single calibration is considered a single run or data set, even though it may take 2 or 3 days. Reproducibility: Reproducibility is the between-run precision.6 Detection Limit (DL): The detection limit (DL) for the 2020we/wi is defined as the minimum value or concentration that can be determined by the meter, which is greater than zero, independent of matrix, glassware, and other sample handling sources of error. It is the detection limit for the optical system of the meter. 1 CFR 40, part 136, appendix B 2 Statistics in Analytical Chemistry: Part 7 – A Review, D. Coleman and L Vanatta, American Laboratory, Sept 2003, P. 31. Skoog, D.A., West, D. M., Fundamental of Analytical Chemistry, 2nd ed., Holt Rinehart and Winston, Inc, 1969, p. 26. 3 4 Statistics in Analytical Chemistry: Part 7 – A Review, D. Coleman and L Vanatta, American Laboratory, Sept 2003, P. 34. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 5 Jeffery G. H., Basset J., Mendham J., Denney R. C., Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, 5th ed., Longman Scientific & Technical, 1989, p. 130. 5 6 Jeffery G. H., Basset J., Mendham J., Denney R. C., Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, 5th ed., Longman Scientific & Technical, 1989, p. 130 CONTENTS AND ACCESSORIES CONTENTS SMART3 Colorimeter Test Tubes, with Caps COD/UDV Adapter USB Wall Adapter USB Cable SMART3 Colorimeter Quick Start Guide SMART3 Colorimeter Manual ACCESSORIES Test Tubes, with Caps Code 0290-6 USB Cable Code 1720 USB Wall Adapter Code 1721 COD/UDV Adapter Code 1724 Car Charger Code 5-0132 SMARTLink3 Program (CD) Code 1901-CD Small Field Carrying Case (37.5 27.5 x 13.75 cm) Code 1910-GCS150 Large Field Carrying Case (45 x 32.5 x 20 cm) Code 1910-GCS440 6 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 EPA COMPLIANCE The SMART3 Colorimeter is an EPA-Accepted instrument. EPA-Accepted means that the instrument meets the requirements for instrumentation as found in test procedures that are approved for the National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (NPDWR) or National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) compliance monitoring programs. EPA-Accepted instruments may be used with approved test procedures without additional approval. CE COMPLIANCE The SMART3 Colorimeter has earned the European CE Mark of Compliance for electromagnetic compatibility and safety. The Declaration of Conformity for the SMART3 colorimeter is available at www.lamotte.com. IP67 CERTIFICATION The SMART3 meets IP67 standards for protection against dust and immersion only when the USB port plug is in place. Documentation is available at www. lamotte.com. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 7 CHEMICAL TESTING WATER SAMPLING FOR CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Taking Representative Samples The underlying factor to be considered for any type of water sampling is whether or not the sample is truly representative of the source. To properly collect a representative sample: • Sample as frequently as possible. • Collect a large sample or at least enough to conduct whatever tests are necessary. • Make a composite sample for the same sampling area. • Handle the sample in such a way as to prevent deterioration or contamination before the analysis is performed. • Perform analysis for dissolved gases such as dissolved oxygen, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide immediately at the site of sampling. Samples for testing these factors, as well as samples for pH, cannot be stored for later examination. • Make a list of conditions or observations which may affect the sample. Other considerations for taking representative samples are dependent upon the source of the sample. Taking samples from surface waters involves different considerations than taking samples from impounded and sub-surface waters. Sampling of Open Water Systems Surface waters, such as those found in streams and rivers, are usually well mixed. The sample should be taken downstream from any tributary, industrial or sewage pollution source. For comparison purposes samples may be taken upstream and at the source of the pollution before mixing. In ponds, lakes, and reservoirs with restricted flow, it is necessary to collect a number of samples in a cross section of the body of water, and where possible composite samples should be made to ensure representative samples. To collect samples from surface waters, select a suitable plastic container with a tight fitting screw cap. Rinse the container several times with the sample to be tested, then immerse the container below the surface until it is filled to overflowing and replace the cap. If the sample is not to be tested immediately, pour a small part of the sample out and reseal. This will allow for any expansion. Any condition which might affect the sample should be listed. Sub-surface sampling is required to obtain a vertical profile of streams, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs at specific depths. This type of sampling requires more sophisticated sampling equipment. For dissolved oxygen studies, or for tests requiring small sample sizes, a Water 8 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 Sampler (LaMotte Code 1060) will serve as a subsurface or in-depth sampler. This weighted device is lowered to the sampling depth and allowed to rest at this depth for a few minutes. The water percolates into the sample chamber displacing the air which bubbles to the surface. When the bubbles cease to rise, the device has flushed itself approximately five times and it may be raised to the surface for examination. The inner chamber of the sampling device is lifted out and portions of the water sample are carefully dispensed for subsequent chemical analysis. A Snap-Plunger Water Sampler (LaMotte Code 1077) is another “in-depth” sampling device which is designed to collect large samples which can be used for a multitude of tests. Basically, this collection apparatus is a hollow cylinder with a spring loaded plunger attached to each end. The device is cocked above the surface of the water and lowered to the desired depth. A weighted messenger is sent down the calibrated line to trip the closing mechanism and the plungers seal the sample from mixing with intermediate layers as it is brought to the surface. A special drain outlet is provided to draw off samples for chemical analysis. Sampling of Closed System To obtain representative samples from confined water systems, such as pipe lines, tanks, vats, filters, water softeners, evaporators and condensers, different considerations are required because of chemical changes which occur between the inlet and outlet water. One must have a basic understanding of the type of chemical changes which occur for the type of equipment used. Also, consideration should be given to the rate of passage and retaining time for the process water. Temperature changes play an important part in deciding exactly what test should be performed. Process water should be allowed to come to room temperature, 20–25°C, before conducting any tests. When drawing off samples from an outlet pipe such as a tap, allow sample to run for several minutes, rinsing the container several times before taking the final sample. Avoid splashing and introduction of any contaminating material. FILTRATION When testing natural waters that contain significant turbidity due to suspended solids and algae, filtration is an option. Reagent systems, whether EPA, Standard Methods, LaMotte or any others, will generally only determine dissolved constituents. Both EPA and Standard Methods suggest filtration through a 0.45 micron filter membrane, to remove turbidity, for the determination of dissolved constituents.** To test for total constituents, organically bound and suspended or colloidal materials, a rigorous high temperature acid digestion is necessary. **LaMotte offers a filtering apparatus: syringe assembly (Code 1050) and membrane filters, 0.45 micron, (Code 1103). SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 9 AN INTRODUCTION TO COLORIMETRIC ANALYSIS Most test substances in water are colorless and undetectable to the human eye. To test for their presence we must find a way to “see” them. The SMART3 Colorimeter can be used to measure any test substance that is itself colored or can be reacted to produce a color. In fact a simple definition of colorimetry is “the measurement of color” and a colorimetric method is “any technique used to evaluate an unknown color in reference to known colors”. In a colorimetric chemical test the intensity of the color from the reaction must be proportional to the concentration of the substance being tested. Some reactions have limitations or variances inherent to them that may give misleading results. Many such interferences are discussed with each particular test instruction. In the most basic colorimetric method the reacted test sample is visually compared to a known color standard. However, accurate and reproducible results are limited by the eyesight of the analyst, inconsistencies in the light sources, and the fading of color standards. To avoid these sources of error, a colorimeter can be used to photoelectrically measure the amount of colored light absorbed by a colored sample in reference to a colorless sample (blank). White light is made up of many different colors or wavelengths of light. A colored sample typically absorbs only one color or one band of wavelengths from the white light. Only a small difference would be measured between white light before it passes through a colored sample versus after it passes through a colored sample. The reason for this is that the one color absorbed by the sample is only a small portion of the total amount of light passing through the sample. However, if we could select only that one color or band of wavelengths of light to which the test sample is most sensitive, we would see a large difference between the light before it passes through the sample and after it passes through the sample. The SMART3 Colorimeter passes one of four colored light beams through one of four optical filters which transmits only one particular color or band of wavelengths of light to the photodectector where it is measured. The difference in the amount of colored light transmitted by a colored sample is a measurement of the amount of colored light absorbed by the sample. In most colorimetric tests the amount of colored light absorbed is directly proportional to the concentration of the test factor producing the color and the path length through the sample. However, for some tests the amount of colored light absorbed is inversely proportional to the concentration. The choice of the correct wavelength for testing is important. It is interesting to note that the wavelength that gives the most sensitivity (lower detection limit) for a test factor is the complementary color of the test sample. For example the Nitrate-Nitrogen test produces a pink color proportional to the nitrate-nitrogen concentration in the sample (the greater the nitrate-nitrogen concentration, the darker the pink color). A wavelength in the green region should be selected to analyze this sample since a pinkish-red solution absorbs mostly green light. 10 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 REAGENT BLANK Some tests will provide greater accuracy if a reagent blank is determined to compensate for any color or turbidity resulting from the reagents themselves. A reagent blank is performed by running the test procedure on demineralized or deionized water. Use sample water to SCAN BLANK. Insert the reacted reagent blank in the colorimeter chamber and select SCAN SAMPLE. Note result of reagent blank. Perform the tests on the sample water as described. Subtract results of reagent blank from all subsequent test results. NOTE: Some tests require a reagent blank to be used to SCAN BLANK. COLORIMETER TUBES Colorimeter tubes which have been scratched through excessive use should be discarded and replaced with new ones. Dirty tubes should be cleaned on both the inside and outside. Fingerprints on the exterior of the tubes can cause excessive light scattering and result in errors. Handle the tubes carefully, making sure the bottom half of the tube is not handled. LaMotte Company makes every effort to provide high quality colorimeter tubes. However, wall thicknesses and diameter of tubes may still vary slightly. This may lead to slight variations in results (e.g. if a tube is turned while in the sample chamber, the reading will likely change slightly). To eliminate this error put the tubes into the sample chamber with the same orientation every time. The tubes that are included with the colorimeter have an index mark to facilitate this. If possible, use the same tube to SCAN BLANK and SCAN SAMPLE. METER CARE The optical system of the SMART3 must be kept clean and dry for optimal performance. Dry the colorimeter tubes before placing them in the chamber to avoid introducing moisture. For best results store the instrument in a area that is dry and free from aggressive chemical vapors. SELECTING AN APPROPRIATE WAVELENGTH The most appropriate wavelength to use when creating a calibration curve is usually the one which gives the greatest change from the lowest reacted standard concentration to the highest reacted standard concentration. However, the absorbance of the highest reacted standard concentration should never be greater than 2.0 absorbance units. Scan the lowest and highest reacted standards at different wavelengths using the absorbance mode to find the wavelength which gives the greatest change in absorbance without exceeding 2.0 absorbance units. Use this wavelength to create a calibration curve. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 11 Below is a list of suggested wavelengths for the color of the reacted samples. Use these as a starting point. Sample Color Wavelength Range Yellow 428 Pink 525 Red 568 Green and Blue 635 CALIBRATION As with all pre-calibrated meters, it is highly recommended, even if not required by regulations, that the user periodically verify the performance of the meter by running standards with a predetermined concentration. Results outside of specification are an indication that the meter needs to be adjusted. This can be done following the user calibration described on page 28. If the user calibration fails to properly adjust the meter then the meter should be returned to LaMotte Company for recalibration. (See page 65). CALIBRATION CURVES The SMART3 Colorimeter contains tests for the LaMotte reagent systems. The first step in using a non-LaMotte reagent system with your SMART3 Colorimeter is to create a calibration curve for the reagent system. To create a calibration curve, prepare standard solutions of the test factor and use the reagent system to test the standard solutions with the SMART3 Colorimeter. Select a wavelength for the test as described above. Plot the results (in ABS or %Transmittance) versus concentration to create a calibration curve. The calibration curve may then be used to identify the concentration of an unknown sample by testing the unknown, reading Absorbance or %T, and finding the corresponding concentration from the curve. The linear range of the reagent system can be determined and this information can be used to input a User Test into the SMART3 Colorimeter (see Edit User Tests, page 41). PROCEDURE Prepare 5 or 6 standard solutions of the factor being tested. The concentration of these standards should be evenly distributed throughout the range of the reagent system, and should include a 0 ppm standard (distilled water). For instance, the solutions could measure 0, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, and 90% of the system’s maximum range. 1. Turn on the SMART3 Colorimeter. Select the appropriate wavelength from the absorbance mode. Be sure to select the appropriate wavelength for the color produced by the reagent system. 2. Use the unreacted 0 ppm standard to standardize the colorimeter by using it 12 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 to scan blank. 3. Following the individual reagent system instructions, react each standard solution beginning with 0 ppm. Continue with standards in increasing concentration. Record the reading and the standard solution concentration on a chart. Readings can be recorded as percent transmittance (%T) or absorbance (A). 4. Plot results on graph paper or computer using any available plotting program. If results are as %T versus concentration, semilog graph paper must be used. Plot the standard solution concentrations on the horizontal, linear axis, and the %T on the vertical, logarithmic axis. If results are as absorbance versus standard solution concentration, simple linear graph paper can be used. Plot the standard solution concentration on the horizontal axis, and the absorbance on the vertical axis. 5. After plotting the results, draw a line, or curve, of best fit through the plotted points. The best fit may not connect the points. There should be approximately an equal number of points above the curve as below the curve. Some reagent systems will produce a straight line, while others produce a curve. Many computer spreadsheet programs can produce the curve of best fit by regression analysis of the standard solution data. NOTE: Only reagent systems which produce a straight line can be used for a User Test. A sample of each type of graph appears below: SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 13 PREPARING DILUTE STANDARD SOLUTIONS Standard solutions should be prepared to create a calibration curve. Standard solutions can be prepared by diluting a known concentrated standard by specified amounts. A chart or computer spreadsheet can be created to determine the proper dilutions. Use volumetric flasks and volumetric pipets for all dilutions. 1. In Column A – Record the maximum concentration of test as determined by the range and path length. 2. In Column B – Record the percent of the maximum concentration the standard solution will be. 3. In Column C – Calculate the final concentration of the diluted standard solutions by multiplying the maximum concentration (In Column A) by the % of maximum concentration divided by 100. (C = A x B/100). 4. In Column D – Record the final volume of the diluted sample (i.e. volume of volumetric flask). 5. In Column E – Record the concentration of the original standard. 6. In Column F – Calculate the milliliters of original standard required (F = (C x D/ )). E A sample chart appears below: A B C= A x B/100 Maximum % of Maximum Final concentration concentration concentration of test of Diluted Standard 14 D E Volume of Concentration Standard of Original Standard F= C x D/E mL of Original Standard Required 10.0 ppm 90 9.0 ppm 100 mL 1000 ppm 0.90 mL 10.0 ppm 70 7.0 ppm 100 mL 1000 ppm 0.70 mL 10.0 ppm 50 5.0 ppm 100 mL 1000 ppm 0.50 mL 10.0 ppm 30 3.0 ppm 100 mL 1000 ppm 0.30 mL 10.0 ppm 10 1.0 ppm 100 mL 1000 ppm 0.10 mL 10.0 ppm 0 0 ppm 100 mL 1000 ppm 0 mL SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 STANDARD ADDITIONS A common method to check the accuracy and precision of a test is by standard additions. In this method a sample is tested to determine the concentration of the test substance. A second sample is then “spiked” by the addition of a known quantity of the test substance. The second sample is then tested. The determined concentration of the spiked sample should equal the concentration of the first plus the amount added with the spike. The procedure can be repeated with larger and larger “spikes.” If the determined concentrations do not equal the concentration of the sample plus that added with the “spike”, then an interference may exist. For example, a 10.0 mL water sample was determined to contain 0.3 ppm iron. To a second 10.0 mL sample, 0.1 mL of 50 ppm iron standard was added. The concentration of iron due to the “spike” was (0.10 mL x 50 ppm)/10.0 mL = 0.50 ppm. The concentration of iron determined in the spiked sample should be 0.3 + 0.5 = 0.8 ppm iron. (Note: any error due to the increased volume from the “spike” is negligible). LaMotte offers a line of calibration standards which can be used to generate calibration curves and perform standard additions. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 15 SAMPLE DILUTION TECHNIQUES & VOLUMETRIC MEASUREMENTS If a test result using the SMART3 Colorimeter gives an over range message then the the sample must be diluted. The test should be repeated on the diluted sample to obtain a reading which is in the concentration range for the test. (Note: This is not true for colorimetric determination of pH.) Example: Measure 5 mL of the water sample into a graduated cylinder. Add demineralized water until the cylinder is filled to the 10 mL line. The sample has been diluted by one-half, and the dilution factor is therefore 2. Perform the test procedure, then multiply the resulting concentration by 2 to obtain the test result. The following table gives quick reference guidelines on dilutions of various proportions. All dilutions are based on a 10 mL volume, so several dilutions will require small volumes of the water sample. Graduated pipets should be used for all dilutions. Size of Sample Deionized Water to Bring Volume to 10 mL Multiplication Factor 10 mL 0 mL 1 5 mL 5 mL 2 2.5 mL 7.5 mL 4 1 mL 9 mL 10 0.5 mL 9.5 mL 20 If the above glassware is not available, dilutions can be made with the colorimeter tube. Fill the tube to the 10 mL line with the sample then transfer it to another container. Add 10 mL volumes of demineralized water to the container and mix. Transfer back 10 mL of the diluted sample to the tube and follow the test procedure. Continue diluting and testing until a reading, which is in the concentration range for the test, is obtained. Be sure to multiply the concentration found by the dilution factor (the number of total 10 mL volumes used). Example: 10 mL of sample is diluted with three 10 mL volumes of demineralized water; the dilution factor is four. 16 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 INTERFERENCES LaMotte reagent systems are designed to minimize most common interferences. Each individual test instruction discusses interferences unique to that test. Be aware of possible interferences in the water being tested. The reagent systems also contain buffers to adjust the water sample to the ideal pH for the reaction. It is possible that the buffer capacity of the water sample may exceed the buffer capacity of the reagent system and the ideal pH will not be obtained. If this is suspected, measure the pH of a reacted distilled water reagent blank using a pH meter. This is the ideal pH for the test. Measure the pH of a reacted water sample using the pH meter. If the pH is significantly different from the ideal value, the pH of the sample should be adjusted before testing. Interferences due to high concentration of the substance being tested, can be overcome by sample dilution (see page 16) STRAY LIGHT INTERFERENCE When scanning samples in 16 mm tubes, such as COD, the sample chamber lid can not be closed. The COD adapter minimizes stray light. To further reduce stray light interference, do not scan sample in direct sunlight. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 17 OPERATION OF THE SMART3 COLORIMETER OVERVIEW The SMART3 is a portable, microprocessor controlled, direct reading colorimeter. It has a graphical liquid crystal display and 6 button keypad. These allow the user to select options from the menu driven software, to directly read test results or to review stored results of previous tests in the data logger. The menus can be displayed in seven different languages. The test library consists of over 80 LaMotte tests and 25 “User Tests”. The LaMotte tests are precalibrated for LaMotte reagent systems.The colorimeter displays the result of these tests directly in units of concentration. The 25 “User Tests” may be used to enter additional calibrations. All of these tests may be arranged in any of 3 sequences. These sequences can be modified a limitless number of times to meet changing testing needs. The optics feature 4 different colored LEDs. Each LED has a corresponding silicon photoiode with an integrated interference filter. The interference filters select a narrow band of light from the corresponding LED for the colorimetric measurements. The microporcessor automatically selects the correct LED/ photodiode combination for the test. A USB wall adapter, USB computer connection or lithium battery powers the SMART3. A USB port on the back of the meter allows an interface of the meter with a Windows-based computer for real-time data acquisition and data storage using a PC. The SMART3 may be interfaced with any Windows-based computer by using the LaMotte SMARTLink3 Program. 18 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 COMPONENTS Figure 1 shows a diagram of the SMART3 Colorimeter and its components. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 19 GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES The operation of the SMART3 Colorimeter is controlled by a microprocessor. The microprocessor is programmed with menu driven software. A menu is a list of choices. This allows a selection of various tasks for the colorimeter to perform, such as, scan blank, scan sample, and edit test sequences. The keypad is used to make menu selections which are viewed in the display. There are three selections accessible from the Main Menu: Testing Menu, Editing Menu and Run PC Link. THE KEYPAD The keypad has 6 buttons which are used to perform specific tasks. This button will scroll up through a list of menu selections. ENTER The button is used to select choices in a menu viewed in the display. This button controls the backlight on the display. This button will scroll down through a list of menu selections. This button exits to the previous menu. EXIT This button turns the meter on or off. ENTER EXIT SAMPLE HOLDERS The sample chamber is designed for 25 mm round tubes. An adapter to hold 16 mm COD tubes and 1 cm square UDV cuvettes is included. Position the COD/UDV Adapter (Code 1724) so that the notches in the adapter fit around the posts on the chamber. Turn the adapter counterclockwise until the arrows are at the top and bottom of the chamber and the adapter is locked into place. Turn the adapter clockwise to unlock the adapter and remove it from the chamber. 20 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 THE DISPLAY & THE MENUS The display allows menu selections to be viewed and selected. These selections instruct the SMART3 to perform specific tasks. The menus are viewed in the display using two general formats that are followed from one menu to the next. Each menu is a list of choices or selections. The display has a header line at the top and a footer line at the bottom. The header displays the title of the current menu. The footer line displays the time and the date, the data logger status and the battery status. The menu selection window is in the middle of the display between the header and the footer. The menu selection window displays information in two general formats. In the first format only menu selections are displayed. Up to 4 lines of menu selections may be displayed. If more selections are available they can be viewed by to scroll the other menu selections into pressing the arrow buttons the menu selection window. Think of the menu selections as a vertical list in the display that moves up or down each time an arrow button is pressed. Some menus in the SMART3 are looping menus. The top and bottom menu choices are connected in a loop. Scrolling down past the bottom of the menu will lead to the top of the menu. Scrolling up past the top of the menu will lead to the bottom of the menu. Header Menu Title Main Window Selection First Choice Second Choice Third Choice Another Footer 12:00:00 001/500 And Another And So On A black bar will indicate the menu choice. As the menu is scrolled through, the black bar will highlight different menu choices. Pressing the ENTER button will select the menu choice that is indicated by the black bar. In the second format the menu choice window takes advantage of the graphical capabilities of the display. Large format graphic information, such as test results or error messages or the LaMotte logo is displayed. The top two lines of the display are used to display information in a large, easy to read format. The menus work in the same way as previously described but two lines of the menu are visible at the bottom of the display. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 21 Header Message or Result Window Menu Title Result or Message Another Main Window Selection And Another Footer 12:00:00 001/500 And So On Last Choice As described previously, the EXIT button allows an exit or escape from the current menu and a return to the previous menu. This allows a rapid exit from an inner menu to the main menu by repeatedly pushing the EXIT button. Pushing at any time will turn the SMART3 off. The display may show the following messages: Battery Status More choices are available and can be viewed by scrolling up and/or down through the display. Header Identifies the current menu and information on units and reagent systems if applicable. Footer In the data logging mode the number of the data point is displayed and the total number of data points in the memory will be shown. The footer also shows current time and battery status 22 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 LOOPING MENUS Long menus, such as All Tests, incorporate a looping feature which allows the user to quickly reach the last choice in the menu from the first choice. In a looping menu the last choices in the menu are above the first choice and scrolling upward moves through the menu in reverse order. Scrolling downward moves through the menu from first choice to last but the menu starts over following the last choice. So all menu choices can be reached by scrolling in either direction. The diagrams below demonstrate a looping menu. AND SO ON AND SO ON AND SO ON : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : THIRD TO LAST LAST CHOICE LAST CHOICE SECOND TO LAST AND SO ON AND SO ON LAST CHOICE : : : : TESTING MENU TESTING MENU TESTING MENU FIRST CHOICE : : : : SECOND CHOICE THIRD TO LAST THIRD TO LAST THIRD CHOICE SECOND TO LAST SECOND TO LAST ANOTHER LAST CHOICE LAST CHOICE 12:00:00 12:00:00 12:00:00 001/500 : : 001/500 : : 001/500 AND ANOTHER FIRST CHOICE FIRST CHOICE AND SO ON SECOND CHOICE SECOND CHOICE : : : THIRD CHOICE THIRD CHOICE : : : LAST CHOICE SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 ANOTHER ANOTHER AND ANOTHER AND ANOTHER 23 TESTING Testing TESTING MENU The Testing Menu is used to run all LaMotte pre-programmed tests, User Tests and Absorbance tests at one of four wavelengths. Testing from any of three sequences can also be done. 1. Press and briefly hold to turn the meter on. The LaMotte logo screen will appear for about 3 seconds and the Main Menu will appear. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Testing Menu. 001/500 Testing Menu All Tests Menu Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to desired option. All Tests contains all of the available pre-programmed tests. The three sequences have user selected tests. Absorbance has %T/ABS tests. 4. Press ENTER to select the option. 001/500 Testing Menu All Tests Menu Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 12:00:00 001/500 All Tests 001 Alkalinity UDV 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 004 Ammonia-N LRS 12:00:00 24 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 TEST SEQUENCES Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 015 Chlorine F UDV 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 079 Phosphate HR 035 Cyanuric Acid 032 Cu UDV 009 Benzotriazole 053 Iron Phenanthro 064 Nitrate-N LR 076 pH UDV 055 Manganese LR 067 Nitrite-N LR 12:00:00 001/500 12:00:00 001/500 12:00:00 001/500 061 Molybdenum HR 064 Nitrate-N LR 074 pH PR 086 Silica HR 067 Nitrite-N LR 078 Phosphate LR 045 Hydrazine 077 Phenol 085 Silica LR 032 Cu UDV 078 Phosphate LR 051 Iron Bipyridyl 090 Sulfide LR These alterable sequences allow a series of tests to be setup that are run frequently. The order of the individual tests in the sequence is determined by the user. After running a test, press ENTER to select the next test in the sequence. Continue this pattern until the entire sequence has been completed. All Tests is a fixed sequence containing the LaMotte pre-programmed tests, User Tests, and Absorbance tests. Modification of the alterable sequences is accomplished through the Editing Menu. This menu is explained in greater detail in Editing Menu (p. 35). Pressing Pressing EXIT while in a sequence menu will escape back to the Testing Menu. the at any time will turn the colorimeter off. GENERAL TESTING PROCEDURES The following are some step by step examples of how to run tests from the Testing Menu. These test procedures are designed to be used with LaMotte SMART Reagent Systems. LaMotte Company continuously updates the list of pre-programmed tests as the calibrations become available. Pre-programmed calibrations can be added to the SMART3 Colorimeter in the field. A Windows-based computer running a Windows Operating System is required. Call LaMotte Technical Services at 1-800-344-3100 (410-778-3100 outside the USA) or email at tech@lamotte.com for a current list of available calibrations and downloading instructions. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 25 Testing Sequence 1, Sequence 2, And Sequence 3 are alterable sequences. They may be edited using the Editing Menu. Any of the LaMotte pre-programmed tests or User Tests may be placed in these sequences in whatever testing order that is preferred. Some examples of typical sequences are given below. Testing TESTING WITH LaMOTTE PRE-PROGRAMMED TESTS 1. Press and briefly hold to turn the meter on. The LaMotte logo screen will appear for about 3 seconds and the Main Menu will appear. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Testing Menu. 001/500 Testing Menu All Test Menu Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 12:00:00 001/500 All Tests 3. Press ENTER to select All Tests Menu. 001 Alkalinity UDV 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 004 Ammonia-N LRS 12:00:00 4. Press or to the desired test. 001/500 All Tests to scroll 001 Alkalinity UDV 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 004 Ammonia-N LRS 12:00:00 5. Press ENTER 001/500 002 Aluminum to select the test. Scan Bank Scan Sample 12:00:00 26 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 002 Aluminum Testing 6. Insert the blank into the chamber. Close the lid.Press ENTER to scan the blank. The screen wil display Blank Done for about 1 second and then return to the Test Menu. Scan Blank Scan Sample 12:00:00 001/500 7. Insert the reacted sample 002 Aluminum into the chamber. Close the lid. Press ENTER to scan the sample. The screen will display READING for about 1 Scan Blank second. The result will appear Scan Sample on the screen. 1.00 ppm 12:00:00 001/500 002 Aluminum 8. To repeat the test, press ENTER to scan the sample again. The last blank scaned is used by the colorimeter for repeated Scan Bank scans. A different blank can be used by pressing or Scan Sample to scroll to Scan Blank 12:00:00 001/500 and then scanning another blank. Scroll with or and make another selection with ENTER . The %T or Absorbance of the last test can be viewed by choosing %T/Abs. Press EXIT to escape to previous menus. NOTE: The menus loop in this screen so either or will lead to the menu selection needed. 1.00 ppm SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 27 Testing CALIBRATING LaMOTTE PRE-PROGRAMMED TESTS The LaMotte Pre-Programmed Tests have been pre-calibrated. Recalibration of the pre-programmed tests by the user is not possible. However, a procedure to standardize the calibration can be performed to obtain the most accurate readings or to meet regulatory requirements. The LaMotte Pre-Programmed tests are standardized with one standard solution. To standardize over the full range of the test, the concentration of the standard should be chosen from the high end of the range. Alternatively, if samples do not cover the full range of the test, a standard should be chosen that is close to the concentration of the samples. The standardization procedure should be followed as often as required by regulations and laws for compliance monitoring. In the example below, the Aluminum calibration will be standardized. Prepare a standard solution to be tested. In this example, 0.30 ppm aluminum. 1. Press and briefly hold to turn the meter on. The LaMotte logo screen will appear for about 3 seconds and the Main Menu will appear. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC LINK 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Testing Menu. 001/500 Testing Menu All Test Menu Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 12:00:00 001/500 All Tests 3. Press ENTER to select All Tests Menu. 001 Alkalinity UDV 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 004 Ammonia-N LRS 12:00:00 28 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 4. Press or to scroll to the desired test factor. All Tests 001 Alkalinity UDV Testing 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 004 Ammonia-N LRS 12:00:00 5. Press ENTER 001/500 002 Aluminum to select the test. Scan Blank Scan Sample 12:00:00 6. Follow the test procedure in the manual to test the prepared standard. Insert the blank into the chamber. Close the lid. Press ENTER to scan the blank. The screen will display Blank Done for about 1 second and then return to the Test Menu. 001/500 002 Aluminum Scan Blank Scan Sample 12:00:00 001/500 7. Insert the reacted standard 002 Aluminum solution into the chamber. Close the lid. Press ENTER to scan the sample. The screen will display Reading for about Scan Blank 1 second. The result will Scan Sample appear on the screen. 0.28 ppm 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 29 Testing 8. The displayed result can now be standardized. Press or to scroll to calibrate. 002 Aluminum 0.28 ppm %T/Abs Calibrate 12:00:00 9. Press ENTER to select Calibrate. A reverse font (dark background with light characters) will appear to indicate that the reading can be adjusted. 001/500 002 Aluminum 0.28 ppm %T/Abs Calibrate 12:00:00 001/500 002 Aluminum 10. Press or to scroll to the concentration of the prepared standard, 0.30 in this example. %T/Abs NOTE: A maximum adjustment of 10% is possible. Calibrate If an adjustment of over 10% 12:00:00 001/500 is attempted, Overrange will be displayed. 0.30 ppm 11. Press ENTER to select Calibrate. Two menu choices will be offered, set calibration and factory setting. 002 Aluminum 0.30 ppm Set Calibration Factory Setting 12:00:00 30 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 Testing 002 Aluminum 12. Press ENTER to select Set Calibration and save the calibration. Or press to scroll to Factory Setting. Press ENTER to select Factory Scan Blank Setting to revert to the factory Scan Sample calibration. The screen will 12:00:00 001/500 display Storing... for about 1 second and the test menu will appear. The calibration has now been standardized and the meter can be used for testing. The standardization can be removed by repeating the calibration and selecting Factory Setting. 31 Testing MEASURING IN THE ABSORBANCE MODE 1. Press and briefly hold to turn the meter on. The LaMotte logo screen will appear for about 3 seconds and the Main Menu will appear. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Testing Menu. 001/500 Testing Menu All Test Menu Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 12:00:00 3. Press or to Absorbance. 001/500 Testing Menu to scroll Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 Absorbance 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER to select Absorbance. 001/500 Absorbance 101 Absorbance 428 102 Absorbance 525 103 Absorbance 568 104 Absorbance 635 12:00:00 32 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 5. Press or to scroll to desired wavelength. Absorbance 101 Absorbance 428 Testing 102 Absorbance 525 103 Absorbance 568 104 Absorbance 635 12:00:00 6. Press ENTER to select the wavelength. 001/500 102 Absorbance 525 Scan Blank Scan Sample 12:00:00 001/500 7. Insert the blank. Close the lid. 102 Absorbance 525 Press ENTER to scan the blank. The screen wil display Blank Done for about 1 second and return to the Absorbance Scan Blank menu. Scan Sample 12:00:00 001/500 8. Insert the reacted sample. 102 Absorbance 525 Press ENTER to scan the sample. The screen will display Reading for about 1 second. The result will appear Scan Blank on the screen. Scan Sample 0.425 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 33 Testing 9. To repeat the test, press ENTER to scan the sample again. The last blank scanned is used by the colorimeter for repeated scans. A different blank can be used by pressing or to scroll to Scan Blank and then scanning another blank. Scroll with or and make another selection with ENTER .The %T or Absorbance of the last test can be viewed by choosing %T/Abs. Press EXIT to escape to previous menus. NOTE: The menus loop in this screen so either or will lead to the menu selection needed. NOTE: The calibrate function does not work in the Absorbance mode. 34 102 Absorbance 525 0.425 Scan Blank Scan Sample 12:00:00 001/500 Next Test Previous Test %T/Abs Calibrate SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 EDITING MENU The Editing Menu allows the user to edit sequences, edit user tests, set the clock, edit the logging function, access factory setting, set the power saving function, set the backlight time, and select a language. The default factory settings are: MM-DD-YYYY Logging Enabled Power Save 5 minutes Backlight 10 seconds Language English Editing/Set Up Date Format EDITING A SEQUENCE The Edit Sequence menu allows three alterable test sequences (Sequence 1, Sequence 2, Sequence 3) to be edited. 1. Press and briefly hold to turn the meter on. The LaMotte logo screen will appear for about 3 seconds and the Main Menu will appear. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 2. Press or to scroll to the Editing Menu. 001/500 Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 3. Press ENTER to select Editing Menu. 001/500 Editing Menu Edit Sequences Edit User Test Set Clock Logging 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 35 4. Press ENTER to select Edit Sequences. Edit Sequences Edit Sequence 1 Edit Sequence 2 Edit Sequence 3 12:00:00 5. Press or to scroll to the desired sequence. 001/500 Edit Sequences Edit Sequence 1 Editing/Set Up Edit Sequence 2 Edit Sequence 3 12:00:00 6. Press ENTER to select the sequence to be edited. 001/500 EDIT SEQUENCE 2 015 Chlorine F UDV 079 Phosphate HR 009 Benzotriazole 076 pH UDV 12:00:00 36 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 ADDING OR DELETING A TEST There are three ways to alter a sequence: Insert Before, Insert After, and Delete. Insert Before adds a new test to the sequence before the selected test. Insert After adds a new test to the sequence after the selected test. Delete is used to remove an existing test from a sequence. ADDING A TEST Below is a step-by-step example of how to add a test to SEQUENCE 2 starting from the EDIT SEQUENCE 2 menu. EDIT SEQUENCE 2 015 Chlorine F UDV 079 Phosphate HR Editing/Set Up 1. To add a test before or after an existing test, press or to scroll to the existing test. 009 Benzotriazole 076 pH UDV 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select the existing test. 001/500 Add or Delete Insert Before Insert After Delete 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to Insert Before or Insert After. 001/500 Add or Delete Insert Before Insert After Delete 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER to select the option, Insert Before, in this example. The All Test Menu will appear. 001/500 All Tests 001 Alkalinity 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 004 Ammonia-N LRS 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 37 5. Press or to scroll to the test that will be added to the sequence. In this example, Aluminum. All Tests 001 Alkalinity UDV 002 Aluminum 003 Ammonia-N LRF 004 Ammonia-N LRS Editing/Set Up 12:00:00 6. Press ENTER to select the test. The sequence will appear in the Edit Sequence menu and the new test will be added to the sequence. All changes in the sequence will be automatically saved. 7. Press EXIT to exit the Edit Sequence menu and return to the Editing Menu. 001/500 EDIT SEQUENCE 2 015 Chlorine F UDV 079 Phosphate HR 002 Aluminum 009 Benzotriazole 12:00:00 001/500 Editing Menu Edit Sequences Edit User Test Set Clock Logging 12:00:00 8. Press ENTER to select Edit Sequences to continue editing the sequences or press EXIT to return to the Main Menu. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 38 001/500 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 DELETING A TEST Below is a step-by-step example of how to delete a test in SEQUENCE 2 starting from the EDIT SEQUENCE 2 menu. 1. To delete a test, press or to scroll to the test in the sequence. EDIT SEQUENCE 2 015 Chlorine F UDV 079 Phosphate HR 002 Aluminum 009 Benzotriazole 12:00:00 ENTER Editing/Set Up 2. Press 001/500 Add or Delete to select the test. Insert Before Insert After Delete 12:00:00 3. Press to Delete. or 001/500 Add or Delete to scroll Insert Before Insert After Delete 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER to select Delete. The sequence will appear in the EDIT SEQUENCE menu and the selected test will have been deleted. All changes to the sequence will automatically have been saved. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 EDIT SEQUENCE 2 015 Chlorine F UDV 079 Phosphate HR 002 Aluminum 12:00:00 001/500 39 5. Press EXIT to exit the Edit Sequence menu and return to the Editing Menu. Editing Menu Edit Sequences Edit User Test Set Clock Logging Editing/Set Up 12:00:00 6. Press ENTER to select Edit Sequences to continue editing the sequences or press EXIT to return to the Main Menu. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 40 001/500 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 EDIT USER TESTS If a test other than the LaMotte programmed tests is performed regularly, a calibration for it may be entered in one of the 25 User Tests. These tests are originally named “User Test 1 - 25”. It will be possible to rename the test, select a wavelength, enter a new calibration, select the number of decimal places used to display the results, and select the units. A User Test may be added for a reagent system for which no precalibrated test exists. A calibration of a LaMotte reagent system may also be entered. The calibration of a User Test can be changed at any time. NOTE: A calibration procedure must be performed before using any of the User Tests. The User Tests can be placed in any of the alterable sequences using Edit Sequences. 1. Press and briefly hold to turn the meter on. The LaMotte logo screen will appear for about 3 seconds and the Main Menu will appear. Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 2. Press or to scroll to the Editing Menu. 001/500 Main Menu Testing Menu Editing Menu Run PC Link 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 41 Editing/Set Up The User Tests have the ability to handle 2 data points. The colorimeter will determine the absorbance of the standards and calculate a response that will be stored to determine the concentration of future samples of unknown concentration. These standards should cover all the concentrations for the range of the test being performed and be scanned beginning with the low concentration and finishing with the high concentration (for more information about this, see CALIBRATION CURVES, page 12). Prepare these standards prior to entering a new calibration. Editing Menu 3. Press ENTER to select Editing Menu. Press to scroll to Edit Sequences Edit User Test. Edit User Test Set Clock Logging 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER to select Edit User Test. 001/500 Edit User Test 105 USER TEST 01 Editing/Set Up 106 USER TEST 02 107 USER TEST 03 108 USER TEST 04 12:00:00 5. Press or to scroll to the desired user test. 001/500 Edit User Test 108 USER TEST 04 109 USER TEST 05 110 USER TEST 06 111 USER TEST 07 12:00:00 6. Press Test. ENTER 001/500 111 USER TEST 07 to select the User Name the Test Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 42 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 NAMING THE TEST A User Test can be up to 16 characters long. The menu choices for each character are 26 upper case letters A to Z, 26 lower case letters a to z, ten numerals 0 to 9, a space, a dash (-) and a decimal point (.). The existing name is displayed on the bottom line of the display. The character which is to be edited will blink and that character is also displayed in the center of the display. The character can be changed by using or to scroll to other characters. Use ENTER to select a character. The edited name is saved at any time by pressing EXIT or by pressing ENTER after selecting the sixteenth character. 111 USER TEST 07 Name the Test Editing/Set Up 1. From the User Test menu, press to scroll to Name the Test. Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Name the Test. A reverse font (dark background with a light character) will appear to indicate the character that will be adjusted. The same character will also appear in the center of the display. 3. Press or to scroll to the desired character. In this example, the test name will be H2O. Name the Test R S T U V W X 111 U SER TEST 07 12:00:00 001/500 Name the Test E F G H I J K 111 U SER TEST 07 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 001/500 43 4. Press ENTER to save the character and move to the next character. Name the Test P Q R 111 H S S ER TEST 07 12:00:00 001/500 Name the Test 5. Press or to scroll to the desired character. Editing/Set Up T U V 2 . 0 1 3 4 5 111 H S ER TEST 07 12:00:00 6. Press ENTER to save the character and move to the next character. 001/500 Name the Test L M N E P Q R 111 H2 E R TEST 07 12:00:00 001/500 Name the Test 7. Press or to scroll to the desired character. L M N O P Q R 111 H2 O R TEST 07 12:00:00 44 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 8. Press ENTER to save the character. Repeat the procedure until the test name is complete. To remove a character, change the character to a space (located after the letter z). Press EXIT to save the name. The sreen will display Storing... and the test name for about 1 second and the meter will return to the Edit Test menu. 111 H2O Name the Test Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 001/500 Editing/Set Up SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 45 SELECTING THE VIAL AND WAVELENGTH The SMART3 Colorimeter accepts three different vials (the 25 mm 0290 tube, UDVs and COD tubes) at 4 different wavelengths (428, 525, 560, and 635 nm). The colorimeter uses different settings for each of the twelve combinations of vial and wavelength. These twelve settings are called channels. Choose the channel with the correct wavelength and vial for the test. 1. From the User Test menu, press or to scroll to Select Vial/WL. 111 H2O Name the Test Select Vial/WL Editing/Set Up STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Select Vial/WL. 001/500 Select Channel Ch1 428nm 25mm Ch2 525nm 25mm Ch3 635nm 25mm Ch4 568nm 25mm 12:00:00 3. Press or to select the channel with the desired wavelingth and vial size combination. 001/500 Select Channel Ch1 428nm 25mm Ch2 525nm 25mm Ch3 635nm 25mm Ch4 568nm 25mm 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER to select the channel. The screen will display Storing... for about 1 second and the meter will return to the Edit Test menu. 111 H2O Name the Test Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 46 001/500 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 ENTERING A TWO POINT CALIBRATION The SMART3 Colorimeter can scan two reacted standards and create a calibration curve. To prepare a calibration curve with multiple data points see Entering a Multiple Calibration Curve (pg. 51). 1. From the User Test menu, press or to scroll to STD (Standard) Calibration. 111 H2O Name the Test Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to the first character of the low concentration. In this example, 1.00 ppm. Low Standard 9 . – 0 1 2 3 0 0.000000 12:00:00 001/500 Low Standard . – 0 1 1 2 3 0 .000000 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 Editing/Set Up 2. Press ENTER to select STD Calibration. The screen will display Low Standard for about 1 second and then display the Low Standard screen. A reverse font (dark background with a light character) will appear to indicate the character that will be adjusted. The same character will also appear in the center of the display. 001/500 001/500 47 4. Press ENTER to save the character and move to the next character. Low Standard 7 8 9 . – 0 1 1 . 000000 12:00:00 Low Standard 5. Press or to scroll to the desired character. Editing/Set Up 001/500 7 8 9 . – 0 1 1 . 000000 12:00:00 6. Press ENTER to save the character and move to the next character. 001/500 Low Standard 9 . – 0 1 2 3 1. 0 00000 12:00:00 001/500 Low Standard 7. Press or to scroll to the desired character. 9 . – 0 1 2 3 1. 0 00000 12:00:00 48 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 High Standard 8. Press ENTER to save the character. Repeat the procedure until the low 9 . – 1 2 3 concentration value is 0 .0000 complete. After the final character is complete the meter will save the low 12:00:00 001/500 concentration value. The screen will display High Standard for about 1 minute and the meter will display the High Standard screen. A reverse font (dark background with a light character) will appear to indicate the character that will be adjusted. The same character will appear in the center of the display. 0 Editing/Set Up 9. Use or and ENTER to select the characters for the high concentration value. In this example, 7.5 ppm. High Standard 9 . – 0 1 2 3 7.50000 0 12:00:00 001/500 10. After the final character is entered the meter will save the high concentration value. Insert Blank The screen will display instructions for completing the calibration procedure.continue 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 49 11. Insert the blank. Press ENTER . The screen will display Blank Done... for about 1 second and the Insert Low Standard screen will appear. Insert Low Standard continue Editing/Set Up 12:00:00 001/500 12. Insert the low standard. Press ENTER . The screen will display Reading... for about 1 second and the Insert High Standard Insert High Standard screen will be displayed. continue 12:00:00 13. Insert the high standard. Press ENTER . The screen will display Reading... for about 1 second and the meter will return to the Edit Test menu. 001/500 111 H2O Name the Test Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 50 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 ENTERING A MULTIPLE POINT CALIBRATION The SMART3 can directly create a 2 point calibration curve. (See Entering a Two Point Calibration on page 47.) To create a multiple point calibration curve, constants obtained from a linear regression of multiple data points can be entered into the SMART 3. 1. Scan reactions of multiple concentrations at the appropriate wavelength in the absorbance mode on the SMART3. 2. Plot the concentration (y axis) versus absorbance (x axis) in a program capable of linear regression such as Excel. 3. Enter the constants obtained from the linear regression equation into the SMART3. Editing/Set Up For Example: y = 0.001x3 – 0.017x2 + 0.181x – 0.049 K0 = – 0.049 K1 = 0.181 K2 = – 0.017 K3 = 0.001 OR (Over Range) = 10 1. From the User Test menu, press or to scroll to Enter Constants. 111 H2O Name the Test Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Enter Constants. 001/500 K0=0.00000 K1=0.00000 K2=0.00000 K3=0.00000 OR=100.00000 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 51 Enter K0 Editing/Set Up 3. Press ENTER to begin entering the values for the constants. A reverse font (dark background 9 . – with a light character) 0 .00000 will appear to indicate the character that will be adjusted. The same character 12:00:00 will also appear in the center of the display. 4. Press or to scroll to the first character of K0. In this example, – 0.049. 0 1 2 3 001/500 Enter K0 8 9 . 0 .00000 – 1 2 3 12:00:00 5. Press ENTER to save the character and move to the next character. 001/500 Enter K0 . 7 8 9 – . – 0 1 00000 12:00:00 001/500 Enter K0 6. Press or to scroll to the next character. 9 . – – . O 00000 12:00:00 7. Press ENTER to save the character and move to the next character. Press or to scroll to the next character. 001/500 Enter K0 7 8 9 . – 0 1 – 0 0 0000 12:00:00 52 1 2 3 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 8. Press ENTER to save the character. Repeat the procedure until the K0 value is complete. After the final character is complete the meter will save the K0 value and the meter will display K1 screen. 9 . – 0 .00000 0 12:00:00 001/500 Enter Overrange 9 . – 0 1 2 3 10.00000 0 12:00:00 10. After the final character is entered the meter will save the constants. The screen will display Storing... and return to the Edit Test menu. 1 2 3 Editing/Set Up 9. Use , and ENTER to select the characters for the remaining values: K1, K2, K3, and over range. In this example, 10 ppm. Enter K1 001/500 111 H2O Name the Test Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 53 SELECTING THE NUMERICAL FORMAT OF THE RESULT Editing/Set Up To input tests with very different ranges, the number of decimal places displayed for a result can be selected. A test which ranges from 20 to 1000 ppm should not be displayed with three decimal places. A test with a range from 0.010 to 0.500 needs three decimal places (the microprocessor will always calculate the concentration to many more significant figures than will be displayed). The choice of 0, 1, 2, or 3 decimal places are available. 1. From the User Test menu, press or to scroll to Decimal Places. 111 H2O Select Vial/WL STD Calibration Enter Constants Decimal Places 12:00:00 001/500 Decimal Places? 2. Press ENTER to select Decimal Places. None 0 One 0.0 Two 0.00 Three 0.000 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to the desired number of decimal places. 001/500 Decimal Places? None 0 One 0.0 Two 0.00 Three 0.000 12:00:00 001/500 111 H2O 4. Press ENTER to select the decimal places. The screen Select Vial/WL wil display Storing... for about STD Calibration 1 second and the meter will return to the Edit Test menu. Enter Constants Decimal Places 12:00:00 54 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 SELECTING THE UNITS OF CONCENTRATION The SMART3 Colorimeter has seven options for units of concentration. They are No Units, ppm, FAU, pH, ppb, ppt and mgL. 1. From the User Menu, press to scroll to Select Units. 111 H2O STD Calibration Enter Constants Decimal Places Select Units 12:00:00 Editing/Set Up 2. Press ENTER to select Select Units. 001/500 Select Units No Units ppm pH FAU 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to the desired units. 001/500 Select Units No Units ppm pH FAU 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER to select the units. The screen will display Storing... for about 1 second and the meter will return to the Edit Test menu. 111 H2O STD Calibration Enter Constants Decimal Places Select Units 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 001/500 55 SETTING THE CLOCK Setting the clock allows the correct time and date stamp to be stored with each reading in the data logger. Editing Menu 1. From the Editing Menu, press or to scroll to Set Edit Sequences Clock. Edit User Test Set Clock Logging Editing/Set Up 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Set Clock. The date is displayed as month-dayyear. The time is displayed as hours:minutes:seconds AM/PM. Press or to scroll to the appropriate character. Press ENTER to select the character. The curser will move to the next character. Set all characters in the same manner. The character menu is a scrolling menu. 3. Press ENTER to select the final character. The time and date will be saved and the meter will return to the Edit Test menu. Set Time Date: MM-DD-YYYY Time: HH-MM-SS AM/PM 12:00:00 001/500 Editing Menu Edit Sequences Edit User Test Set Clock Logging 12:00:00 56 001/500 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 LOGGING DATA The default setting for the data logger is enabled. The meter will log the last 500 data points. The counter in the center bottom of the display will show how many data points have been logged. The display will show 500+ when the data logger has exceeded 500 points and the data points are being overwritten. Editing Menu 1. From the Editing Menu, press or to scroll to Edit Sequence Logging. Edit User Test Set Clock Logging 2. Press ENTER to select Logging. 001/500 Editing/Set Up 12:00:00 Logging Display Test Log Enable Logging Disable Logging Erase Log 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to desired function. 001/500 Logging Display Test Log Enable Logging Disable Logging Erase Log 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER . The screen will display Storing... for about 1 second and return to the Logging menu. 001/500 Logging Display Test Log Enable Logging Disable Logging Erase Log 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 57 5. Press EXIT to return to the Editing Menu. Editing Menu Edit Sequence Edit User Test Set Clock Logging 12:00:00 001/500 FACTORY SETUP Editing/Set Up The Factory Setup menu is used in manufacturing of the SMART3 Colorimeter. This menu is not for use by the operator in the field. SETTING POWER SAVE The power saving Auto Shutoff feature will turn the meter off when a button has not been pushed for a set amount of time. The default setting is disabled. To change the setting: 1. From the Editing Menu, press Editing Menu or to scroll to Set Set Clock PWR Save. Logging Factory Setup Set PWR Save 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Set PWR Save. 001/500 Auto Shutoff Disable 5 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to desired function. 001/500 Auto Shutoff Disable 5 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 12:00:00 58 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 4. Press ENTER . The screen will display Storing... for about 1 second and the meter will return to the Editing Menu. Editing Menu Set Clock Logging Factory Setup Set PWR Save 12:00:00 001/500 Editing/Set Up SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 59 SETTING THE BACKLIGHT TIME Editing/Set Up The backlight illuminates the display for enhanced viewing. The default setting is 10 seconds. If Button Control is chosen the backlight button on the key pad will act as an on/off switch and the backlight will remain on or off when the meter is being used. When one of the other settings – 10, 20 or 30 seconds – is chosen, the display will be illuminated for the specified amount of time after any button is pressed. NOTE: The backlight feature uses a significant amount of power. The longer the backlight is on, the more frequently the battery will have to be charged if the USB/Wall Adapter is not being used. 1. From the Editing Menu, press Editing Menu or to scroll to Logging Backlight Time. Factory Setup Set PWR Save Set Backlight Time 12:00:00 2. Press ENTER to select Set Backlight Time. 001/500 Backlight Time Button Control 10 seconds 20 seconds 30 seconds 12:00:00 3. Press or to desired option. 001/500 Backlight Time to scroll Button Control 10 seconds 20 seconds 30 seconds 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER . The screen will display Storing... for about 1 second and the meter will return to the Editing Menu. 001/500 Editing Menu Logging Factory Setup Set PWR Save Set Backlight Time 12:00:00 60 001/500 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 SELECTING A LANGUAGE There are seven languages available in the SMART3: English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Italian, Chinese, and Japanese. Editing Menu 1. From the Editing Menu, press or to scroll to Factory Setup Select Language. Set PWR Save Set Backlight Time Select Language 12:00:00 Editing/Set Up 2. Press ENTER to select Select Language. 001/500 Select Language English Spanish French Portugese 12:00:00 3. Press or to scroll to desired language. 001/500 Select Language English Spanish French Portugese 12:00:00 4. Press ENTER . The screen will display Storing... for about 1 second and the meter will return to the Editing Menu. 001/500 Editing Menu Factory Setup Set PWR Save Set Backlight Time Select Language 12:00:00 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 001/500 61 NOTE: If meter unintentionally switches to another language, use the procedure above to reset the meter to the desired language. For example, to reset the meter to English: 1. Turn meter on. 2. Press one time. Press 3. Press seven times. Press ENTER . ENTER . . Editing/Set Up 4. Press ENTER 62 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 COMPUTER CONNECTION PC LINK The SMART3 may be interfaced with any Windows-based computer by using the LaMotte SMARTLink 3 Program and USB Cable. The program will store test information and results in a database. To transfer data from the meter to a computer, plug the smaller end of the USB cable (USB mini B connector) into the meter and the larger end of the USB cable (USB Type A connector) into a USB port on a computer. The SMART3 will send the following data: test name, wavelength, concentration, transmittance, absorbance, sample, blank, time of test, and date of test. OUTPUT USB COMPUTER CONNECTION USB Type A, USB mini B, Order Cable Code 1720. SMARTLINK3 SmartLink3 records the above data and appends a test ID# which uniquely identifies the test in the database, the serial number of the meter, and a site ID# which can be used to associate the test record with a site or customer via the SmartLink3 program. It also stores a “test number” which is useful for the SMART3. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 63 BATTERY BATTERY/AC OPERATION The SMART3 may be operated on battery power, using a USB wall adapter or USB computer connection. If using the meter as a bench top unit, use the wall adapter if possible to extend the battery life. The meter will remain on when the USB adapter is used. To charge the battery with the wall adapter, plug the smaller end of the USB cable (USB mini B connector) into the meter and the larger end of the USB cable (USB Type A connector) into the wall adapter. Plug the wall adapter into an AC outlet. Reinsert the USB port plug after charging. To charge the battery from a computer, plug the smaller end of the USB cable (USB mini B connector) into the meter and the larger end of the USB cable (USB Type A connector) into a USB port on a computer. The battery icon will show no bars and flash when the unit first turns on. Then the indicator will indicate the battery status by showing 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 bars. It will take 5 hours to fully charge a low battery. The battery icon will flash when the battery is charging. The battery icon will show four bars and stop flashing when it is fully charged. The charging circuit will automatically switch to a float charge when the battery is fully charged. The charger may remain connected. Some computers will NOT supply power to their USB ports during standby operation. The wall adapter will charge the unit continuously. The battery icon will show no bars and continuously flash if the battery is getting low but the unit will still operate normally. A “Low Battery” message on the status bar of the display will replace the time when the battery voltage is too low for proper operation and accuracy may be degraded. A “Shutdown Low Batt” message on the display will appear for a few seconds before the power is switched off when the battery is too low to operate the unit. To extend the battery life: • Shut down the unit with the power switch when not taking measurements or use the power save option to have the unit automatically turn off after 5 minutes. • Store the unit in a cool dry place. • Fully charge the battery before storing the unit for extended periods of time. • Limit backlight use. The unit consumes 3X normal power with the backlight on. Set the backlight time option to 10 seconds, or select “Button Control” and keep the backlight off. Battery replacement: The lithium ion battery used in this unit should last for many years with normal use. When it no longer powers the unit long enough to meet testing requirements it will need to be replaced. Lithium ion batteries that are properly charged and stored do not usually lose all capacity; they just have 64 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 less capacity after hundreds of charge cycles. This unit uses a custom battery assembly that is only available from LaMotte Company. Battery replacement must be performed at a LaMotte authorized repair facility. The water resistant housing of this meter should not be opened by the user. Contact LaMotte Company by phone (1-800-344-3100) or email (tech@lamotte.com) for a return authorization number. MAINTENANCE CLEANING Clean the exterior housing with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not allow water to enter the light chamber or any other parts of the meter. To clean the light chamber and optics area, point a can of compressed air into the light chamber and blow the pressurized air into the light chamber. Use a cotton swab dampened with Windex® window cleaner to gently swab the interior of the chamber. Do not use alcohol; it will leave a thin residue over the optics when dry. REPAIRS Should it be necessary to return the meter for repair or servicing, pack the meter carefully in a suitable container with adequate packing material. A return authorization number must be obtained from LaMotte Company by calling 800344-3100 (US only) or 410-778-3100, faxing 410-778-6394, or emailing tech@ lamotte.com. Often a problem can be resolved over the phone or by email. If a return of the meter is necessary, attach a letter with the return authorization number, meter serial number, a brief description of problem and contact information including phone and FAX numbers to the shipping carton. This information will enable the service department to make the required repairs more efficiently. METER DISPOSAL Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Natural resources were used in the production of this equipment. This equipment may contain materials that are hazardous to health and the environment. To avoid harm to the environment and natural resources, the use of appropriate take-back systems is recommended. The crossed out wheeled bin symbol on the meter encourages the use of these systems when disposing of this equipment. Take-back systems will allow the materials to be reused or recycled in a way that will not harm the environment. For more information on approved collection, reuse, and recycling systems contact local or regional waste administration or recycling services. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 65 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR MESSAGES OVER RANGE If the message OVERRANGE is displayed when scanning a sample, the sample may be over range or under range. If the sample is over range the sample should be diluted and tested again (see Sample Dilution Techniques and Volumetric Measurements, page 16). If overrange is displayed, press ENTER to continue testing on diluted samples. Note: After pressing ENTER , the overrange cncentration will be displayed. This concentration is an approximation only. 002 Aluminum Overrange continue Scan Blank Scan Sample 12:00:00 001/500 CALIBRATION As with all pre-calibrated meters, it is highly recommended, even if not required by regulations, that the user periodically verify the performance of the meter by running standards with a predetermined concentration. Results outside of specification are an indication that the meter needs to be adjusted. This can be done following the user calibration described on page 28. If the user calibration fails to properly adjust the meter then the meter should be returned to LaMotte Company for recalibration. (See page 65). STRAY LIGHT The SMART3 Colorimeter should have no problems with stray light. Make sure that the sample compartment lid is always fully closed, except when testing COD with the adapter. 66 SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE PROBLEM Flashing REASON SOLUTION Low battery. Readings Charge battery or use are reliable. USB wall/computer adapter. “Low Battery” Battery voltage is very Charge battery or use low. Readings are not USB wall/computer reliable. adapter. “Shut Down Low Batt” Shut Down Battery is too low to operate the unit. Charge battery or use USB wall/computer adapter. “Overrange” Sample is outside of acceptable range. Dilute sample and test again. Unusually large negative or positive readings when performing calibration Incorrect standards used to calibrate meter. Use fresh 0.0 standard in clean tube. Reset meter to factory default settings. Recalibrate meter. SMART3 Colorimeter 11.10 67 1910-TEST 2.28.11 SMART3 COLORIMETER REAGENT SYSTEMS SMART3 REAGENT SYSTEMS LIST LaMotte Company continuously updates the list of pre-programmed tests as the calibrations become available. Pre-programmed calibrations can be added to the SMART3 Colorimeter in the field. A Windows-based computer running a Windows Operating System and an 8 pin mini-DIN/9 pin F D-submin serial cable (order Code 1771) are required. Call LaMotte Technical Services at 1-800-344-3100 (410-778-3100 outside the USA) or email at tech@lamotte.com for a current list of available calibrations and downloading instructions. Test Factor (Test #) Range (ppm) MDL Test Method (# of Reagents) # of Tests Alkalinity-UDV (001) 0–200 10 Unit Dose Vials (1) 50 Aluminum (002) 0.00–0.30 0.01 Eriochrome Cyanine R (4) 50 Ammonia NitrogenLow Range, Fresh Water (003) 0.00–1.00 0.05 Salicylate (3) 25 Ammonia NitrogenLow Range, Salt Water (004) 0.00–1.00 0.10 Salicylate (3) 25 Ammonia NitrogenHigh Range (005) 0.00–4.00 0.05 Nesslerization (2) 50 Benzotriazole (009) 0.0–30.0 0.5 UV Photolysis (3) 50 Biguanide (006) 0–70 2 Colorimetric 50 Borate-UDV (007) 0.0–80.0 5.0 Unit Dose Vial (1) 50 Boron (008) 0.00-0.80 0.05 Azomethine-H (2) 50 Bromine-Low Range (010) 0.00–9.00 0.1 DPD (3) 100 Bromine-UDV (011) 0.0–20.0 0.25 DPD (1) 50 Cadmium (012) 0.00–1.00 0.04 PAN (4) 50 Carbohydrazide (013) See Oxygen Scavengers 0.000–0.900 0.01 Iron Reduction (3) 100 Chloride-TesTab (020) 0.0–30.0 0.4 Argentometric (1) 50 Chlorine-Liquid DPD (017) 0.00–4.00 0.03 DPD (3) 144 Chlorine-Tablet DPD (014) 0.00–4.00 0.03 DPD (3) 100 Chlorine-Free-UDV (015) 0.00–10.00 0.10 DPD (1) 50 Chlorine-Total-UDV (18) 0.00–10.00 0.10 DPD (1) 50 Chlorine Dioxide (019) 0.00–8.00 0.10 DPD (2) 100 Chromium, Hexavalent (021) 0.00–1.00 0.01 Diphenylcarbohydrazide 50 Chromium, Hex, Tri, Total (021) 0.00–1.00 0.01 Diphenylcarbohydrazide 50 Cobalt (023) 0.00–2.00 0.04 PAN (3) 50 COD-Low Range (024) 0–150 7.5 Digestion (1) 25 COD-Standard Range (025) 0-1500 40 Digestion (1) 25 COD-High Range (026) 0–15000 400 Digestion (1) 25 Color (027) 0–1000 20 Platinum Cobalt (0) – Copper-BCA-Low Range (028) 0.00–3.50 0.04 Bicinchoninic Acid (1) 50 Copper-Cuprizone (030) 0.00–2.50 0.03 Cuprizone (2) 50 Copper-DDC (031) 0.00–7.00 0.10 Diethyldithiocarbamate (1) 50 Copper-UDV (032) 0.0–4.0 0.1 Bicinchoninic Acid (1) 50 Cyanide (034) 0.00-0.50 0.01 Pyridine-Barbituric Acid (5) 50 Cyanuric Acid (035) 5–200 10 Melamine (1) 50 Cyanuric Acid-UDV (036) 5–150 10 Melamine (1) 50 DEHA (037) See Oxygen Scavengers 0.000–0.700 0.01 Iron Reduction (3) 100 Dissolved Oxygen (038) 0.0–10.0 0.6 Winkler Colorimetric (3) 100 Erythorbic Acid (049) See Oxygen Scavengers 0.00–3.00 0.02 Iron Reduction (3) 100 Fluoride (040) 0.00–2.00 0.10 SPADNS (2) 50 Hardness (Total) UDV (043) 0–450 10 Unit dose Vial (1) 50 Hydrazine (045) 0.00–1.00 0.01 P-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde (2) 50 Hydrogen PeroxideLow Range (046) 0.00–1.50 0.02 DPD (2) 100 Hydrogen PeroxideHigh Range (047) 0.0–80.0 0.5 DPD (2) 50 Hydrogen Peroxide-Shock (048) 0–300 5 DPD (2) 100 Hydroquinone (049) See Oxygen Scavengers 0.00–2.00 0.01 Iron Reduction (3) 100 Iodine (050) 0.00–14.00 0.15 DPD (2) 100 Iron-Bipyridyl (051) 0.00–6.00 0.10 Bipyridyl (2) 50 Iron-Phenanthroline (053) 0.00–5.00 0.06 1,10 Phenanthroline (2) 50 Iron-UDV (052) 0.00–10.00 0.05 Bipyridyl (1) 50 Lead (054) 0.00–5.00 0.10 PAR (5) 50 Manganese-Low Range (055) 0.00–0.70 0.01 PAN (3) 50 Manganese-High Range (056) 0.0–15.0 – Periodate (2) 50 Mercury (057) 0.00–1.50 0.01 TMK (3) 50 Methylethylketoxime (058) See Oxygen Scavengers 0.00–3.00 0.01 Iron Reduction (3) 100 Molybdenum-High Range (061) 0.0–50.0 0.6 Thioglycolate (3) 50 Nickel (063) 0.00–8.00 0.15 Dimethylglyoxime (6) 50 Nitrate Nitrogen-Low Range (064) 0.00–3.00 0.10 Cadmium Reduction (2) 20 Nitrate TesTab (065) 0-60 5 Zinc Reduction (1) 50 Nitrate-UDV (066) 0.00-80.0 2 Zinc Reduction (1) 100 Nitrite Nitrogen-Low Range (067) 0.00–0.80 0.02 Diazotization (2) 20 Nitrogen, Total (069) 3-25 mg/L 3 mg/L Chromotropic Acid/Digestion (6) 25 Oxygen Scanvengers various various DEHA (3) 50 Ozone-DPD (070) 0.00–3.00 0.03 DPD (3) 144 Ozone-Low Range (071) 0.00–0.40 0.02 Indigo Trisulfonate (3) 100 Ozone-High Range (072) 0.00–3.00 0.05 Indigo Trisulfonate (3) 20 pH-Chlorophenol Red (073) 5.0–6.8 – Chlorophenol Red (1) 100 pH-Phenol Red (074) 6.6–8.4 – Phenol Red (1) 100 pH-Thymol Blue (075) 8.0–9.6 – Thymol Blue (1) 100 Phenol (077) 0.00-6.00 0.05 Aminoabtipyrine (2) 50 Phosphate-Low Range (078) 0.00–3.00 0.05 Ascorbic Acid Reduction (2) 25 Phosphate-High Range (079) 0.0–70.0 0.5 Vanodomolybdphosphoric Acid (1) 25 Phosphorus, ppb (080) 0–3000 ppb 50 Ascorbic Acid/Reduction (5) 50 Phosphorus, Total, Low Range (081) 0.00–3.50 mg/L 0.50 Ascorbic Acid/Digestion 25 Phosphorus, Total, High-Range (082) 0.0–70.0 mg/L 5 Molybdovanadate/Digestion (5) 25 Potassium (083) 0.0-10.0 0.8 Tetraphenylboron (2) 100 Silica-Low Range (085) 0.0–4.0 0.05 Heteropoly Blue (4) 50 Silica-High Range (086) 0–75 0.5 Silicomolybdate (3) 50 Sulfate-High Range (089) 0–100 3 Barium Chloride (1) 50 Sulfide-Low Range (090) 0.00–1.50 0.06 Methylene Blue (3) 50 Surfactants (094) 0.00-8.00 0.75 Bromphenol Blue (3) 100 Tannin (096) 0.0–10.0 0.1 Tungsto-molybdophosphoric Acid (2) 50 Tolytriazole (009) See Benzotriazole 0.0–30.0 0.5 UV Photolysis (3) 50 Turbidity (098) 0.0–30.0 FTU 3 Absorption (0) – Zinc-Low Range (099) 0.00–3.00 0.05 Zincon (6) 50 ALKALINITY–UDV UNIT DOSE VIALS • CODE 4318-J QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 1 Alkalinity Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches 4318-J Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters; swimming pool water. RANGE: 0–200 ppm as CaCO3 MDL: 10 ppm METHOD The sample is added to a buffered indicator reagent. The color that develops, ranging from yellow to blue, will indicate the amount of alkalinity in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after & PRESERVATION: collection. Sample may be refrigerated for 24 hours. INTERFERENCES: Quats and poly quats at high concentrations will interfere. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 ALKALINITY, UDV Test Procedures 1 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 001 Alkalinity UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 001 Alkalinity UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to an Alkalinity-UDV vial (4318). 10. Wait 90 seconds. Test Procedures 11. Invert vial 3 times to mix. NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder. Mix. 12. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 13. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTES: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. ALKALINITY, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 ALUMINUM ERIOCHROME CYANINE R METHOD CODE 364I-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 5g *Aluminum Inhibitor Reagent *7865-C 2 x 120 mL *Aluminum Buffer Reagent *7866-J 120 mL Aluminum Indicator Reagent 7867-J 15 mL Aluminum Complexing Reagent 7868-E 1 Spoon, 0.05 g, plastic 0696 2 Pipets, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 Test Tube, glass, 5 mL w/cap 0230 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastewater. RANGE: 0.00–0.30 ppm Aluminum MDL: 0.01 ppm METHOD: Aluminum ions buffered to a pH of 6.0 react with Eriochrome Cyanine R dye to produce a pink to red complex in proportion to the concentration. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Collect sample in acid washed glass or plastic bottle. Analyze as soon as possible. INTERFERENCES: Fluoride and polyphosphate will interfere. Interference from iron and manganese is eliminated by the addition of an inhibitor. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 ALUMINUM Test Procedures Aluminum is the third most common element in the earth’s crust, which accounts for its wide appearance in many water supplies. Aluminum exists in water as soluble salts, colloidal compounds, and insoluble compounds. In wastewater that has been treated by alum coagulation it will appear in one or more of the above forms. Properly treated drinking water should have an aluminum concentration below 0.05 mg/L. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 002 Aluminum). 4. Scroll to and select 002 Aluminum from menu. 5. Rinse a clean colorimeter tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into colorimeter chamber and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Rinse a clean test tube (0230) with sample water. Fill to the 5 mL line with sample. 8. Remove tube from colorimeter. Empty sample from tube (0290). 9. Add 5 mL sample from test tube (0230) to empty tube (0290). 10. Use the 0.05 g spoon (0696) to add one measure of *Aluminum Inhibitor Reagent (7865). Cap and mix to dissolve powder. Test Procedures 11. Use a 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2 mL of *Aluminum Buffer Reagent (7866). Cap and mix. 12. Use a second 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1 mL of Aluminum Indicator Reagent (7867). Cap and mix contents. Wait 5 minutes for maximum color development. 13. At end of 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 14. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For the best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Add 5 drops of Aluminum Complexing Reagent (7868). Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. ALUMINUM SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 AMMONIA NITROGEN - LOW RANGE SALICYLATE METHOD • CODE 3659-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL *Salicylate Ammonia #1 *3978-H 10 g *Salicylate #2 *7457-D 2x5g *Salicylate #3 Reagent Powder *7458-C 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Spoon, 0.15 g, plastic 0727 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Ammonia nitrogen is present in various concentrations in many surface and ground water supplies. Any sudden change in the concentration of ammonia nitrogen in a water supply is cause for suspicion. A product of microbiological activity, ammonia nitrogen is sometimes accepted as chemical evidence of pollution when encountered in natural waters. APPLICATION: Low concentrations of ammonia in fresh, brackish and salt water; fresh and salt water aquariums. RANGE: 0.00 - 1.00 ppm Ammonia-Nitrogen MDL: 0.05 ppm Fresh Water 0.10 ppm Salt Water METHOD: Salicylate and ammonia react at high pH in the presence of a chlorine donor and an iron catalyst to form a blue indophenol dye, the concentration of which is proportional to the ammonia concentration in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLE & PRESERVATION: Ammonia solutions tend to be unstable and should be analyzed immediately. Samples may be stored for 24 hours at 4°C or 28 days at –20°C. INTERFERENCES: There are few interferences in most natural waters. High concentrations of reducing agents, such as hydrazine, react with the chlorine donor and can result in negative interferences. Color and turbidity can also interfere. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 AMMONIA NITROGEN, Low Range Test Procedures Ammonia is rapidly oxidized in natural water systems by special bacterial groups that produce nitrite and nitrate. This oxidation requires that dissolved oxygen be available in the water. Ammonia is an additional source of nitrogen as a nutrient which may contribute to the expanded growth of undesirable algae and other forms of plant growth that overload the natural system and cause pollution. PROCEDURE - FRESH WATER 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 003 Ammonia-N LRF) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 003 Ammonia-N LRF from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. (See Note.) 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1.0 mL plastic pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of *Salicylate Ammonia #1 (3978). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 0.15 g spoon (0727) to add two measures of *Salicylate #2 Reagent (7457). Cap and mix until dissolved. Wait 1 minute. Test Procedures 9. At end of 1 minute waiting period use 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add two measures of *Salicylate #3 Reagent Powder (7458). Cap and shake vigorously for at least 30 seconds and all solid has dissolved. Wait 12 minutes for maximum color development. 10. At the end of the 12 minute waiting period, immediately mix and insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu CALCULATIONS: To express results as Unionized Ammonia (NH3): ppm Unionized Ammonia (NH3) = ppm Ammonia-Nitrogen (NH3–N) x 1.2 To express results as Ionized Ammonia (NH4): ppm Ionized Ammonia (NH4+) = ppm Ammonia-Nitrogen (NH3–N) x 1.3 To determine the percentages of Unionized and Ionized Ammonia-Nitrogen, consult the Appendix. NOTE: It is strongly suggested that a reagent blank be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. AMMONIA NITROGEN, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE - SALT WATER 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 004 Ammonia-N LRS) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 004 Ammonia-N LRS from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. (See Note.) 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1.0 mL plastic pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of *Salicylate Ammonia #1 (3978). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 0.15 g spoon (0727) to add two measures of *Salicylate #2 Reagent (7457). Cap and mix until dissolved. Wait 1 minute. 9. At end of 1 minute waiting period use 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add two measures of *Salicylate #3 Reagent Powder (7458). Cap and shake vigorously for at least 30 seconds and all solid has dissolved. Wait 20 minutes for maximum color development. 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu CALCULATIONS: To express results as Unionized Ammonia (NH3): ppm Unionized Ammonia (NH3) = ppm Ammonia-Nitrogen (NH3–N) x 1.2 To express results as Ionized Ammonia (NH4): ppm Ionized Ammonia (NH4+) = ppm Ammonia-Nitrogen (NH3–N) x 1.3 To determine the percentages of Unionized and Ionized Ammonia-Nitrogen, consult the Appendix. NOTE: It is strongly suggested that a reagent blank be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 AMMONIA NITROGEN, Low Range Test Procedures 10. At the end of the 20 minute waiting period, immediately mix and insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures AMMONIA NITROGEN, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 AMMONIA NITROGEN - HIGH RANGE NESSLERIZATION METHOD •CODE 3642-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL Ammonia Nitrogen Reagent #1 V-4797-G *Ammonia Nitrogen Reagent #2 *V-4798-G 2 x 30 mL 1 Pipet, 1 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Ammonia nitrogen is present in various concentrations in many surface and ground water supplies. Any sudden change in the concentration of ammonia nitrogen in a water supply is cause for suspicion. A product of microbiological activity, ammonia nitrogen is sometimes accepted as chemical evidence of pollution when encountered in natural waters. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–4.00 ppm Ammonia Nitrogen MDL: 0.05 ppm METHOD: Ammonia forms a colored complex with Nessler’s Reagent in proportion to the amount of ammonia present in the sample. Rochelle salt is added to prevent precipitation of calcium or magnesium in undistilled samples. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Ammonia solutions tend to be unstable and should be analyzed immediately. Sample may be stored for 24 hours at 4°C or 28 days at –20°C. INTERFERENCES: Sample turbidity and color may interfere. Turbidity may be removed by a filtration procedure. Color interference may be eliminated by blanking the instrument with a sample blank. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 AMMONIA NITROGEN, High Range Test Procedures Ammonia is rapidly oxidized in natural water systems by special bacterial groups that produce nitrite and nitrate. This oxidation requires that dissolved oxygen be available in the water. Ammonia is an additional source of nitrogen as a nutrient which may contribute to the expanded growth of undesirable algae and other forms of plant growth that overload the natural system and cause pollution. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Scroll to and select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 005 Ammonia-N HR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 005 Ammonia-N HR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. (See Note) 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add 8 drops of Ammonia Nitrogen Reagent #1 (V-4797). Cap and mix. Wait 1 minute. 8. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1.0 mL of *Ammonia Nitrogen Reagent #2 (V-4798). Cap and mix. Allow 5 minutes for maximum color development. 9. At end of the 5 minute waiting period, immediately mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press the menu or make another menu selection. EXIT exit to a previous Test Procedures CALCULATIONS: To express results as Unionized Ammonia (NH3): ppm Unionized Ammonia (NH3) = ppm Ammonia-Nitrogen (NH3–N) x 1.2 To express results as Ionized Ammonia (NH4): ppm Ionized Ammonia (NH4+) = ppm Ammonia-Nitrogen (NH3–N) x 1.3 To determine the percentages of Unionized and Ionized Ammonia-Nitrogen, consult the Appendix. NOTE: It is strongly suggested that a reagent blank be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. AMMONIA NITROGEN, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BENZOTRIAZOLE/TOLYLTRIAZOLE UV Photolysis Method • CODE 4047 QUANTITY 15 g 25 mL 25 mL CONTENTS *Benzotriazole Reagent Potassium Sodium Tartrate Solution *Sulfuric Acid CODE *3818-E 7841WT-G *6139WT-G 1 pH Test Papers, 1–11 2956 1 Spoon, 0.25 g, plastic 0695 1 Erlenmeyer Flask, 25 mL, glass 2-2109 1 Graduated Cylinder, 25 mL, glass 0417 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Equipment needed but not supplied: UV Shielding Goggles 31041 1 Pen-Ray UV Lamp 31041-1 1 Pen-Ray Lamp Power Source 31041-2 Proper safety precautions must be followed when using the Pen-Ray UV lamp and power source (31041-1 and 31041-2) to prevent eye and skin damage. Always wear the UV Shielding Goggles (31041) while the lamp is turned on. Never handle the lamp itself; always hold it by the socket. Wipe the lamp dry with a clean, soft tissue after each test. Do not operate the lamp outside the Erlenmeyer Flask filled with water. Benzotriazole and tolyltriazole form strong complexes with metals. They are used in antifreeze for cars, lubricating oil, and photographic anti-fogging agents. In cooling water systems benzotriazole and tolyltriazole are used as corrosion and rust inhibitors together with many kinds of scale inhibitors, bactericides and algaecides. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BENZOTRIAZOLE/TOLYTRIAZOLE Test Procedures 1 Corrosion and rust inhibitors in cooling water systems RANGE: 0.0 – 30.0 ppm Benzotriazole 0.0 – 30.0 ppm Tolyltriazole MDL: 0.5 ppm Benzotriazole 0.5 ppm Tolyltriazole METHOD: Benzotriazole and tolyltriazole are UV-photolyzed in a buffered solution with a pH between 4 and 6. A yellow color develops in proportion to the concentration of triazole present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. INTERFERENCES: Tolyltriazole with interfere in the benzotriazole test. Benzotriazole will interfere in the tolyltriazole test. Strong reducing or oxidizing agents will interfere. Test Procedures APPLICATION: BENZOTRIAZOLE/TOLYTRIAZOLE SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BENZOTRIAZOLE PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 009 Benzotriazole) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 009 Benzotriazole from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. Discard the sample. 8. Adjust the sample water temperature to between 20 and 25°C if necessary. 9. Fill the graduated cylinder (0417) to the 25 mL line with sample water. Transfer to the Erlenmeyer Flask (2-2109). 10. Use the pH Test Paper (2956) to check the pH of the sample. If the pH is not between 4 and 6, add one drop of *Sulfuric Acid, 1.0N (6139). Swirl to mix. Continue adding *Sulfuric Acid, 1.0N (6139) one drop at a time, swirling to mix and checking the pH after each drop, until the pH is between 4 and 6. 11. Add 10 drops of Potassium Sodium Tartrate (7841WT). 13. Replace the flask in the slot in the case. Insert the Pen-Ray Lamp (31041-1) into the flask. Plug in the Pen-Ray Power Source (31041-2) and turn the lamp on for exactly 5 minutes. Remove the lamp from the flask. Rinse and wipe the lamp dry. 14. Fill a test tube (0290) to the 10 mL line with the digested sample. Cap tube. 15. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm Benzotriazole. 16. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BENZOTRIAZOLE/TOLYTRIAZOLE Test Procedures 12. Use the 0.25 g spoon (0695) to add one measure of *Benzotriazole Reagent (3818). Swirl to mix until the powder has dissolved. TOLYLTRIAZOLE PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 097 Tolyltriazole) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 097 Tolyltriazole from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. Discard the sample. 8. Adjust the sample water temperature to between 20 and 25°C if necessary. 9. Fill the graduated cylinder (0417) to the 25 mL line with sample water. Transfer to the Erlenmeyer Flask (2-2109). 10. Use the pH Test Paper (2956) to check the pH of the sample. If the pH is not between 4 and 6, add one drop of *Sulfuric Acid, 1.0N (6139). Swirl to mix. Continue adding *Sulfuric Acid, 1.0N (6139) one drop at a time, swirling to mix and checking the pH after each drop, until the pH is between 4 and 6. Test Procedures 11. Add 10 drops of Potassium Sodium Tartrate (7841WT). 12. Use the 0.25 g spoon (0695) to add one measure of *Benzotriazole Reagent (3818). Swirl to mix until the powder has dissolved. 13. Replace the flask in the slot in the case. Insert the Pen-Ray Lamp (31041-1) into the flask. Plug in the Pen-Ray Power Source (31041-2) and turn the lamp on for exactly 5 minutes. Remove the lamp from the flask. Rinse and wipe the lamp dry. 14. Fill a test tube (0290) to the 10 mL line with the digested sample. Cap tube. 15. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm Tolyltriazole. 16. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. BENZOTRIAZOLE/TOLYTRIAZOLE SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BIGUANIDE COLORIMETRIC METHOD • CODE 4044 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 2 X 60 mL Biguanide Indicator 3994-H 1 Pipet, plastic, 1.0 mL 0354 Biguanide is a non-chlorine, non-bromine chemical sanitizer. It is more stable than chlorine or bromine and has little chemical odor. Biguanide is an effective bacteriacide but, unlike chlorine and bromine, it does not destroy organic contaminants. Therefore, hydrogen peroxide is added to biguanide pools on a regular basis to eliminate organic contaminants. The optimum recommended level of biguanide is 30 to 50 ppm. Swimming pools RANGE: 0–70 ppm Biguanide MDL: 2 ppm METHOD: Biguanide complexes with the proprietary indicator to produce a colored solution. The color ranges from yellow through green to blue depending on the biguanide concentration. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible. INTERFERENCES: The only interfering substances that are likely to be encountered in pool water are oxidized manganese and oxidizing agents, such as chlorine, bromine and ozone. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BIGUANIDE Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 006 Biguanide) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 006 Biguanide from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of Biguanide Indicator (3994). Cap and invert three times to mix. 9. Wait 1 minute. 10. Insert the tube into chamber. Close lid. 11. Select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm Biguanide Test Procedures 12. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. BIGUANIDE SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BORATE - UDV UNIT DOSE VIALS • CODE 4322-J QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 50 Borate UDV, 20 pouches 4322-J Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Some swimming pools use a borate buffering system. Borates lower the level of carbon dioxide in the pool, which slows algae growth. This results in a lower chlorine requirement. Free chlorine levels in pools with borate systems can be maintained at 1.0 ppm. Small amounts of boron are necessary for plant growth but large amounts can be toxic. In humans, boron aids in the uptake of calcium and the production of strong bones. An excess of boron can affect the central nervous system resulting in a syndrome known as borism. Some natural waters may contain small amounts of boron. Large concentrations may be due to industrial effluent entering waterways. Boron compounds are used in cleaning compounds, paper and paints, fertilizers, glass and ceramics, fire retardants and the production of alloys. In the atomic energy field, boron is a component of neutron shields and nuclear reactors. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BORATE, UDV Test Procedures 1 swimming pools, surface and saline waters, hydroponic solutions, industrial waste. RANGE: 0.00 – 80.0 ppm boron MDL: 5 ppm METHOD: Borate reacts with a selective boron indicator powder to form a colored complex at pH 7.2 to 7.4 in proportion to the concentration of boron present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Store samples in polyethylene bottles. Do not use borate detergents or glassware. INTERFERENCES: Interferences in swimming pool water are unlikely. Test Procedures APPLICATION: BORATE, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter 1. Press 2. Press until colorimeter turns on. ENTER to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 007 Borate UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 007 Borate UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close the lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove the vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to a Borate UDV vial (4322). 10. Wait 3 minute. 11. Invert the vial three times to mix. 12. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm borate. 13. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. NOTE: UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BORATE, UDV Test Procedures NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting or air bubbles form, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder and bubbles. Mix. Test Procedures BORATE, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BORON AZOMETHINE-H METHOD · CODE 4868-01 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 120 mL *Boron Buffer *4869-J 10 g *Boron Indicator Powder *4870-D 1 Pipet, plastic, 1.0 mL 0354 1 Spoon, 0.15 g 0727 1 Dark storage chamber, brown 0108 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Surface and saline waters, hydroponic solutions, industrial waste, swimming pools. RANGE: 0.00–0.80 ppm Boron MDL: 0.05 METHOD: Azomethine-H and borate form a yellow complex at pH 6 in proportion to the concentration of boron present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Store samples in polyethylene bottles. Do not use borate detergents or glassware. INTERFERENCES: Interferences in drinking water are unlikely. Manganese, zirconium, chromium, titanium, copper, vanadium, aluminum, beryllium and iron may cause high results. SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 BORON Test Procedures Small amounts of boron are necessary for plant growth but large amounts can be toxic. In humans, boron aids in the uptake of calcium and the production of strong bones. An excess of boron can affect the central nervous system resulting in a syndrome known as borism. Some natural waters may contain small amounts of boron. Large concentrations may be due to industrial effluent entering waterways. Boron compounds are used in cleaning compounds, paper and paints, fertilizers, glass and ceramics, fire retardants and the production of alloys. In the atomic energy field, boron is a component of neutron shields and nuclear reactors. Some swimming pools use boron buffering systems. PROCEDURE 1. This test requires a Reagent Blank. Rinse a tube (0290) with clear, colorless, boron free water. Fill to 10 mL line with clear, colorless, boron free water. 2. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2 mL of *Boron Buffer (4869). Cap and mix. 3. Use the 0.15 g spoon (0727) to add one level measure of *Boron Indicator Powder (4870). Press full spoon against side of jar to compress powder. Scrape off excess powder on inside neck of bottle. Tap excess off spoon handle. 4. Cap and shake vigorously for 30 seconds. 5. Insert the tube into meter chamber. Close lid. 6. Start a timer set for 30 minutes. Do not open the lid during the waiting time. The reaction is photosensitive. 7. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with Sample Water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample water. Repeat steps 2–4. 8. Insert the tube into the Dark Storage Chamber (0108). Close top. Test Procedures 9. Start a second timer set for 30 minutes. Do not open the chamber during the waiting time. The reaction is photosensitive. 10. When 2 minutes remain on the first timer (Reagent Blank), press and hold ON button until colorimeter turns on. 11. Press and hold 12. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 13. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 008 Boron) from TESTING MENU. 14. Scroll to and select 008 Boron from menu.At the end of the Reagent Blank 30 minute waiting period, remove Reagent Blank tube from meter chamber. Invert several times to mix. 15. Insert the tube into meter chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 16. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 17. At the end of the Sample Water 30 minute waiting period, remove Sample Water tube from Dark Storage Chamber. Invert several times to mix. 18. Insert tube into meter chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm boron. 19. Press to turn colorimeter off or press the menu or make another menu selection. BORON EXIT to exit to a previous SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 BROMINE DPD TABLET METHOD • CODE 3643-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 100 *DPD #1 Instrument Grade Tablets *6903A-J 100 *DPD #3 Instrument Grade Tablets *6197A-J 15 mL Glycine Solution 6811-E 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Like chlorine, bromine is an effective germicidal agent employed in drinking water treatment, pool and spa water sanitization, food service sanitation, and other public health applications. Drinking, surface, and saline waters; swimming pool water; domestic and industrial waters and wastes. RANGE: 0.00–9.00 Bromine MDL: 0.1 ppm METHOD: In buffered sample bromine reacts with diethyl-pphenylene diamine (DPD) to produce a pink-red color in proportion to the concentration of bromine present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Bromine in aqueous solutions is not stable, and the bromine content of samples or solutions, particularly weak solutions, will rapidly decrease. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of bromine present in such solutions. For best results start analysis immediately after sampling. Samples to be analyzed for bromine cannot be preserved or stored. INTERFERENCE: The only interfering substance likely to be encountered in water is oxidized manganese. The extent of this interference can be determined by treating a sample with sodium arsenite to destroy the bromine present so that the degree of interference can be estimated. Iodine and chlorine can also interfere, but these are not normally present unless they have been added as sanitizers. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BROMINE, DPD Tablet Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE A: BROMINE (NO CHLORINE) 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 010 Bromine LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 010 Bromine LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add one *DPD #1 Instrument Grade Tablet (6903A). Cap tube and and shake for 10 seconds. Invert slowly 5 times. Solution will turn pink if bromine is present. 8. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Test Procedures 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press the menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous PROCEDURE B: BROMINE IN THE PRESENCE OF CHLORINE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 010 Bromine-LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 010 Bromine-LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Rinse a second clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. Add 5 drops of Glycine Solution (6811). Cap and mix. 8. Remove blank from colorimeter. Add one *DPD#1 Instrument Grade Tablet (6903). Cap tube and shake for 10 seconds. Invert slowly 5 times. Solution will turn pink if bromine is present. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press the menu or make another menu selection. BROMINE, DPD Tablet EXIT to exit to a previous SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE C: FREE AVAILABLE, TOTAL AVAILABLE & COMBINED CHLORINE IN THE PRESENCE OF BROMINE 1. Perform the test for free and combined chlorine as previously described. 2. Perform the test for bromine in the presence of chlorine. Calculations: Residual Bromine (ppm) = Reading BR Free Chlorine in the Presence of Bromine = Free Chlorine - 0.45 (Reading BR) Total Chlorine in the Presence of Bromine = Total Chlorine - 0.45 (Reading BR) Combined Chlorine in the Presence of Bromine = Total Chlorine - Free Chlorine NOTE: Combined chlorine is not affected by the presence of bromine, so the calculation is the same as when only chlorine is present. Test Procedures SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BROMINE, DPD Tablet Test Procedures BROMINE, DPD Tablet SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BROMINE - UDV DPD METHOD–UNIT DOSE VIALS · CODE 4311-J QUANTITY 1 CONTENTS *Free Chlorine Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches CODE *4311-J *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Like chlorine, bromine is an effective germicidal agent employed in drinking water treatment, pool and spa water sanitization, food service sanitation, and other public health applications. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BROMINE, UDV Test Procedures 1 APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, and saline waters; swimming pool water; domestic and industrial waters and wastes. RANGE: 0.0–20.0 ppm Bromine MDL: 0.25 ppm METHOD: In buffered sample bromine reacts with diethyl-pphenylene diamine (DPD) to produce a pink-red color in proportion to the concentration of bromine present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Bromine in aqueous solutions is not stable, and the bromine content of samples or solutions, particularly weak solutions, will rapidly decrease. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of bromine present in such solutions. For best results start analysis immediately after sampling. Samples to be analyzed for bromine cannot be preserved or stored. INTERFERENCE: The only interfering substance likely to be encountered in water is oxidized manganese. The extent of this interference can be determined by treating a sample with sodium arsenite to destroy the bromine present so that the degree of interference can be estimated. Test Procedures Iodine and chlorine can also interfere, but these are not normally present unless they have been added as sanitizers. BROMINE, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 011 Bromine-UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 011 Bromine-UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close the lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove the vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to a *Free Chlorine UDV vial (4311). 10. Shake vigorously until powder dissolves completely. NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting or air bubbles form, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder and bubbles. Mix. 12. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTES: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 BROMINE, UDV Test Procedures 11. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm bromine. Test Procedures BROMINE, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CADMIUM PAN METHOD • CODE 4017-01 QUANTITY 60 mL CONTENTS *Buffered Ammonia Reagent 15 mL 30 mL Sodium Citrate, 10% *PAN Indicator CODE *4020-H 6253-E *4021-G 30 mL Stabilizing Reagent 4022-G 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 2 Pipet, 0.5 mL, plastic 0369 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Cadmium is used in batteries, paint pigments, electroplating processes, and with other metals in the preparation of alloys. The solubility of cadmium in natural water is proportional to the hardness or alkalinity of the water. Cadmium is not an essential nutrient for plants and animals. It is extremely toxic and can accumulate in the kidneys and liver. Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial wastewater. RANGE: 0.00–1.00 ppm Cadmium MDL: 0.04 ppm METHOD: PAN (1-[2-Pyridylazo]-2-Naphthol) forms a red complex with Cadmium (Cd+2) at a pH of 10. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analyze sample as soon as possible. If sample must be stored, acidify with nitric acid to a pH below 2. INTERFERENCES: Ag+2, Co+2, Cu+2, Mn+2, Ni+2, Zn+2, Y+3, In+3 SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CADMIUM Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 012 Cadmium) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 012 Cadmium from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1.0 mL of *Buffered Ammonia Reagent (4020). Swirl to mix. 8. Add two drops of Sodium Citrate, 10% (6253). Swirl to mix. 9. Use a 0.5 mL pipet (0369) to add 0.5 mL of PAN Indicator (4021). Swirl to mix. 10. Use a 0.5 mL pipet (0369) to add 0.5 mL Stabilizing Reagent (4022). Cap and mix. Test Procedures 11. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 12. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. CADMIUM SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORIDE ARGENTOMETRIC METHOD · CODE 3693-SC QUANTITY 50 1 CONTENTS *Chloride Spectrophotometric Grade Tablets Tablet Crusher CODE *3885A-H 0175 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Chloride is one of the major anions found in water and sewage. The presence of chlorides in large amounts may be due to the natural process of water passing through salt formations in the earth, or it may be evidence of the intrusion of seawater or pollution from industrial processes or domestic wastes. The salt content of water affects the distribution of plant and animal life in an aquatic system, based on the amount of salt they can tolerate. Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastewaters. RANGE: 0.0–30.0 ppm Chloride MDL: 0.4 ppm METHOD: Silver nitrate reacts with chloride to form turbid silver chloride in proportion to the amount of chloride in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Collect samples in clean, chemically resistant glass or plastic containers. No preservative is needed if sample is to be stored. INTERFERENCES: Substances in amounts normally found in drinking water will not interfere. Bromide, iodide, cyanide, sulfide, thiosulfate, sulfide and orthophosphate will interfere. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORIDE, Tablet Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 020 Chloride Tablet) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 020 Chloride Tablet from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add one *Chloride Spectrophotometric Grade Tablet (3885A). 9. Use Tablet Crusher (0175) to crush tablet. 10. Cap tube. 11. Invert 2 times. 12. Wait 3 minutes. Do NOT mix. Test Procedures 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm chloride. 14. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. The reagent system is temperature sensitive. The calibration is for 25ºC If sample is at 30ºC, multiply resulting ppm by 1.1. If the sample is at 20º, multiply ppm by 0.9. CHLORIDE, Tablet SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE LIQUID DPD METHOD · CODE 4859 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL DPD 1A Free Chlorine Reagent P-6740-G 30 mL *DPD 1B Free Chlorine Reagent *P-6741-G 30 mL *DPD 3 Total Chlorine Reagent *P-6743-G *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. The fact that chlorine can be easily detected and measured makes chlorine a favorite water sanitizer of those concerned with the public safety of water supplies. Chlorine concentrations in the range of 0.1 to 0.4 parts per million are usually maintained in municipal supplies. Chlorine can be added in the form of chlorine gas, liquid sodium hypochlorite (bleach), granular calcium hypochlorite or as organic chlorine compounds. Chlorine is not present in natural water supplies; if it is present it is the result of chlorination of a water supply or of chlorinated compounds being discharged as waste from industrial operations. The presence of chlorine in concentrations above 0.5 parts per million should be considered evidence of pollution from chlorine treated effluents or from a process in which high concentrations of chlorine are used. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, DPD Liquid Test Procedures All water for cities and communities must be sanitized; even waters that come from clean sources, protected watersheds, reservoirs, and deep wells, are commonly sanitized to assure safety. Chlorine is the most commonly used sanitizer for several reasons: it is effective against a wide range of microorganisms, the cost is low, and the methods of applying it have been well developed. If an adequate concentration of chlorine is present in the water for a few minutes, disease producing bacteria will be destroyed. A number of conditions affect the sanitizing action of chlorine. In municipal systems these can be controlled so that if chlorine is detectable, it can be assumed that bacteria have been killed. The factors that influence the rate of sanitization are temperature, pH, presence of other materials that react with chlorine, time, and the concentrations of the various chlorine combinations that are formed in the water with ammonia and other substances that react with chlorine. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, and saline waters; swimming pool water; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–4.00 ppm Chlorine MDL: 0.03 ppm METHOD: In the absence of iodide, free available chlorine reacts instantly with DPD to produce a red color. Subsequent addition of potassium iodide evokes a rapid color response from the combined forms of chlorine (chloramines). SAMPLE HANDLING Chlorine in aqueous solutions is not stable, and the & PRESERVATION: chlorine content of samples or solutions, particularly weak solutions, will rapidly decrease. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of chlorine present in such solutions. For best results, start analysis immediately after sampling. Samples to be analyzed for chlorine cannot be preserved or stored. Test Procedures INTERFERENCE: The only interfering substance likely to be encountered in water is oxidized manganese. The extent of this interference can be determined by treating a sample with sodium arsenite to destroy the chlorine present so that the degree of interference can be measured. Iodine and bromine can give a positive interference, but these are not normally present unless they have been added as sanitizers. CHLORINE, DPD Liquid SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE–FREE CHLORINE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 016 Chlorine Liq DPD) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 016 Chlorine Liq DPD from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 5 drops of DPD 1A Free Chlorine Reagent (P-6740). 9. Add 5 drops of *DPD 1B Free Chlorine Reagent (P-6741). Cap and mix. 10. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as ppm free chlorine. PROCEDURE–TOTAL CHLORINE 11. Add 5 drops of *DPD 3 Total Chlorine Reagent (P-6743). Cap and mix. 12. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as ppm total chlorine. 13. Subtract the Free Chlorine reading from the Total Chlorine reading to determine ppm combined chlorine. 14. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, DPD Liquid Test Procedures NOTE: For wastewater samples, Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater recommends waiting 2 minutes for full color development. Test Procedures CHLORINE, DPD Liquid SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE DPD TABLET METHOD • CODE 3643-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 100 *DPD #1 Instrument Grade Tablets *6903A-J 100 *DPD #3 Instrument Grade Tablets *6197A-J 15 mL Glycine Solution 6811-E 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. The fact that chlorine can be easily detected and measured makes chlorine a favorite water sanitizer of those concerned with the public safety of water supplies. Chlorine concentrations in the range of 0.1 to 0.4 parts per million are usually maintained in municipal supplies. Chlorine can be added in the form of chlorine gas, liquid sodium hypochlorite (bleach), granular calcium hypochlorite or as organic chlorine compounds. Chlorine is not present in natural water supplies; if it is present it is the result of chlorination of a water supply or of chlorinated compounds being discharged as waste from industrial operations. The presence of chlorine in concentrations above 0.5 parts per million should be considered evidence of pollution from chlorine treated effluents or from a process in which high concentrations of chlorine are used. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, DPD Tablet Test Procedures All water for cities and communities must be sanitized; even waters that come from clean sources, protected watersheds, reservoirs, and deep wells, are commonly sanitized to assure safety. Chlorine is the most commonly used sanitizer for several reasons: it is effective against a wide range of microorganisms, the cost is low, and the methods of applying it have been well developed. If an adequate concentration of chlorine is present in the water for a few minutes, disease producing bacteria will be destroyed. A number of conditions affect the sanitizing action of chlorine. In municipal systems these can be controlled so that if chlorine is detectable, it can be assumed that bacteria have been killed. The factors that influence the rate of sanitization are temperature, pH, presence of other materials that react with chlorine, time, and the concentrations of the various chlorine combinations that are formed in the water with ammonia and other substances that react with chlorine. Drinking, surface, and saline waters; swimming pool water; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–4.00 ppm Chlorine MDL: 0.03 ppm METHOD: In the absence of iodide, free available chlorine reacts instantly with DPD to produce a red color. Subsequent addition of potassium iodide evokes a rapid color response from the combined forms of chlorine (chloramines). SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Chlorine in aqueous solutions is not stable, and the chlorine content of samples or solutions, particularly weak solutions, will rapidly decrease. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of chlorine present in such solutions. For best results, start analysis immediately after sampling. Samples to be analyzed for chlorine cannot be preserved or stored. INTERFERENCE: The only interfering substance likely to be encountered in water is oxidized manganese. The extent of this interference can be determined by treating a sample with sodium arsenite to destroy the chlorine present so that the degree of interference can be measured. Test Procedures APPLICATION: Iodine and bromine can give a positive interference, but these are not normally present unless they have been added as sanitizers. CHLORINE, DPD Tablet SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE–FREE CHLORINE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 014 Chlorine) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 014 Chlorine from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add one *Chlorine DPD #1 Instrument Grade Tablet (6903A). Cap tube and shake for 10 seconds.Invert slowly 5 times. Solution will turn pink if free chlorine is present. 8. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. PROCEDURE–COMBINED CHLORINE NOTE: For wastewater samples, Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater recommends waiting 2 minutes for full color development. 10. Insert sample into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as Total Chlorine. 11. Subtract free chlorine reading from total chlorine reading to obtain concentration of combined chlorine. 12. Press the to turn off the colorimeter or press the previous menu or make another menu selection. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 EXIT to exit to a CHLORINE, DPD Tablet Test Procedures 9. Add one *Chlorine DPD #3 Instrument Grade Tablet (6197A) to sample from Step 8 above. Cap tube and shakefor 10 seconds. Invert slowly 5 times. An increase in color represents combined chlorine. Test Procedures CHLORINE, DPD Tablet SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, FREE - UDV DPD METHOD–UNIT DOSE VIALS · CODE 4311-J QUANTITY 1 CONTENTS *Free Chlorine Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches CODE *4311-J *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 All water for cities and communities must be sanitized; even waters that come from clean sources, protected watersheds, reservoirs, and deep wells, are commonly sanitized to assure safety. Chlorine is the most commonly used sanitizer for several reasons: it is effective against a wide range of microorganisms, the cost is low, and the methods of applying it have been well developed. If an adequate concentration of chlorine is present in the water for a few minutes, disease producing bacteria will be destroyed. A number of conditions affect the sanitizing action of chlorine. In municipal systems these can be controlled so that if chlorine is detectable, it can be assumed that bacteria have been killed. The factors that influence the rate of sanitization are temperature, pH, presence of other materials that react with chlorine, time, and the concentrations of the various chlorine combinations that are formed in the water with ammonia and other substances that react with chlorine. The fact that chlorine can be easily detected and measured makes chlorine a favorite water sanitizer of those concerned with the public safety of water supplies. Chlorine concentrations in the range of 0.1 to 0.4 parts per million are usually maintained in municipal supplies. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, Free, UDV Test Procedures 1 Test Procedures Chlorine can be added in the form of chlorine gas, liquid sodium hypochlorite (bleach), granular calcium hypochlorite or as organic chlorine compounds. Chlorine is not present in natural water supplies; if it is present it is the result of chlorination of a water supply or of chlorinated compounds being discharged as waste from industrial operations. The presence of chlorine in concentrations above 0.5 parts per million should be considered evidence of pollution from chlorine treated effluents or from a process in which high concentrations of chlorine are used. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, and saline waters; swimming pool water; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–10.00 ppm Chlorine MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: In the absence of iodide, free available chlorine reacts instantly with DPD to produce a red color. Subsequent addition of potassium iodide evokes a rapid color response from the combined forms of chlorine (chloramines). SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Chlorine in aqueous solutions is not stable, and the chlorine content of samples or solutions, particularly weak solutions, will rapidly decrease. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of chlorine present in such solutions. For best results, start analysis immediately after sampling. Samples to be analyzed for chlorine cannot be preserved or stored. INTERFERENCE: The only interfering substance likely to be encountered in water is oxidized manganese. The extent of this interference can be determined by treating a sample with sodium arsenite to destroy the chlorine present so that the degree of interference can be measured. Iodine and bromine can give a positive interference, but these are not normally present unless they have been added as sanitizers. CHLORINE, Free, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 015 Chlorine F UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 015 Chlorine F UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close the lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove the vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to a *Free Chlorine UDV vial (4311). 10. Invert 3 times to mix. NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting or air bubbles form, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder and bubbles. Mix. 12. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTES: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, Free, UDV Test Procedures 11. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm free chlorine. Test Procedures CHLORINE, Free, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, TOTAL - UDV DPD METHOD–UNIT DOSE VIALS · CODE 4312-J QUANTITY 1 CONTENTS *Total Chlorine Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches CODE *4312-J *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 All water for cities and communities must be sanitized; even waters that come from clean sources, protected watersheds, reservoirs, and deep wells, are commonly sanitized to assure safety. Chlorine is the most commonly used sanitizer for several reasons: it is effective against a wide range of microorganisms, the cost is low, and the methods of applying it have been well developed. If an adequate concentration of chlorine is present in the water for a few minutes, disease producing bacteria will be destroyed. A number of conditions affect the sanitizing action of chlorine. In municipal systems these can be controlled so that if chlorine is detectable, it can be assumed that bacteria have been killed. The factors that influence the rate of sanitization are temperature, pH, presence of other materials that react with chlorine, time, and the concentrations of the various chlorine combinations that are formed in the water with ammonia and other substances that react with chlorine. The fact that chlorine can be easily detected and measured makes chlorine a favorite water sanitizer of those concerned with the public safety of water supplies. Chlorine concentrations in the range of 0.1 to 0.4 parts per million are usually maintained in municipal supplies. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, Total, UDV Test Procedures 1 Test Procedures Chlorine can be added in the form of chlorine gas, liquid sodium hypochlorite (bleach), granular calcium hypochlorite or as organic chlorine compounds. Chlorine is not present in natural water supplies; if it is present it is the result of chlorination of a water supply or of chlorinated compounds being discharged as waste from industrial operations. The presence of chlorine in concentrations above 0.5 parts per million should be considered evidence of pollution from chlorine treated effluents or from a process in which high concentrations of chlorine are used. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, and saline waters; swimming pool water; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–10.00 ppm Chlorine MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: In the absence of iodide, free available chlorine reacts instantly with DPD to produce a red color. Subsequent addition of potassium iodide evokes a rapid color response from the combined forms of chlorine (chloramines). SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Chlorine in aqueous solutions is not stable, and the chlorine content of samples or solutions, particularly weak solutions, will rapidly decrease. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of chlorine present in such solutions. For best results, start analysis immediately after sampling. Samples to be analyzed for chlorine cannot be preserved or stored. INTERFERENCE: The only interfering substance likely to be encountered in water is oxidized manganese. The extent of this interference can be determined by treating a sample with sodium arsenite to destroy the chlorine present so that the degree of interference can be measured. Iodine and bromine can give a positive interference, but these are not normally present unless they have been added as sanitizers. CHLORINE, Total, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 017 Chlorine T UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 017 Chlorine T UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close the lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove the vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3mL of sample to a *Total Chlorine UDV vial (4312). 10. Invert 3 times to mix. NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting or air bubbles form, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder and bubbles. Mix. 12. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm total chlorine. 13. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTES: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE, Total, UDV Test Procedures 11. Wait 2 minutes. Test Procedures CHLORINE, Total, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE DIOXIDE DPD METHOD • CODE 3644-SC QUANTITY 100 CONTENTS *DPD #1 Instrument Grade Tablets CODE *6903A-J 15 mL Glycine Solution 6811-E 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Chlorine dioxide is used as a substitute for and an adjunct to chlorine in water treatment. It is better than chlorine in eliminating taste and odor in certain cases. Chlorine dioxide, unlike chlorine, does not produce carcinogenic chlorinated organic compounds when reacted with organic materials. A disadvantage is the higher cost of producing chlorine dioxide compared to chlorine. Drinking and pool waters; domestic and industrial wastewater; food sanitization. RANGE: 0.00–8.00 ppm Chlorine Dioxide MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: Chlorine dioxide reacts with DPD to form a red color in proportion to the concentration. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Test as soon as possible to avoid loss of chlorine dioxide. INTERFERENCE: Chlorine interference can be removed with the use of glycine. Very high levels of chloramines may interfere if the test result is not read immediately. Oxidized manganese interferes but can be removed with arsenite. Bromine and iodine interfere. Chromate interference can be removed with a thioacetamide blank correction. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHLORINE DIOXIDE Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 019 Chlorine Diox) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 019 Chlorine Diox from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add 5 drops of Glycine Solution (6811). 8. Add one *Chlorine DPD #1 Instrument Grade Tablet (6903A). Cap and shake for 10 seconds. Invert 5 times slowly. Fill to 10 mL line with sample water. Solution will turn pink if chlorine dioxide is present. 9. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. CHLORINE DIOXIDE SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHROMIUM, HEXAVALENT DIPHENYLCARBOHYDRAZIDE METHOD CODE 3645-SC QUANTITY 10 g CONTENTS *Chromium Reagent Powder CODE *V-6276-D 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 50 Filter Paper 0465-H 1 Funnel, Plastic 0459 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Chromium may be present in water containing waste from industries such as metal plating. It is considered to be a toxic chemical and, if present in an amount of over 0.5 ppm, is evidence of contamination from untreated or incompletely treated industrial waste. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, & saline waters; domestic and industrial wastewaters. RANGE: 0.00–1.00 ppm Chromium MDL: 0.01 ppm METHOD: Hexavalent chromium reacts with 1,5 diphenylcarbohydrazide under acidic conditions to form a red-purple color in proportion to the amount of chromium present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analysis for chromium should be made as quickly as possible after sample collection since storage in glass or plastic containers may result in low chromate values. INTERFERENCES: High concentrations of mercurous and mercuric ions may impart a blue color to the chromium determination. Iron and vanadium in concentrations above 1 mg/L may result in a yellow color. However, the vanadium color becomes negligible 10 minutes after the addition of diphenylcarbohydrazide. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHROMIUM, Hexavalent Test Procedures Chromium is one of a class of heavy metals found in the bottom mud of polluted bodies of water. Certain shellfish are capable of concentrating this element, endangering the health of its ultimate consumer, human or animal. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 021 Chromium) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 021 Chromium from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 0.1g spoon (0699) to add one measure of *Chromium Reagent Powder (V-6276). Cap and shake until powder dissolves. Wait 3 minutes for full color development. 8. During waiting period, fold a piece of filter paper (0465) in half then half again to form a cone. Push corners together to open end, and insert into funnel (0459). Test Procedures 9. At the end of 3 minute waiting period, filter sample into a clean tube. Mix. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: To convert result to ppm chromate (CrO4–2) multiply by 2.23. To convert result to ppm sodium chromate (Na2CrO4) multiply by 3.12. Highly buffered waters may give poor results and require a more careful pH adjustment. Before adding *Chromium Reagent Powder, adjust pH of sample to pH 3–4. CHROMIUM, Hexavalent SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHROMIUM - HEXAVALENT, TRIVALENT & TOTAL DIPHENYLCARBOHYDRAZIDE METHOD CODE 3698-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL *Sulfuric Acid, 5N *7681-H 10 g *Chromium Reagent Powder *V-6276-D 15 mL *Sodium Azide, 5% *7683-E 30 mL Potassium Permanganate, 0.5% 7682-G 60 mL Deionized Water 5115PT-H Pipet, plain, glass, w/cap 0341 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Graduated Cylinder, 50 mL, glass 0418 1 Erlenmeyer Flask, 125 mL, glass 0431 1 Test tube holder 1113 1 Filter Paper 0465 1 Funnel, Plastic 0459 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. A toxic chemical, chromium is found in two forms in the water; trivalent chromium (Cr3+) and hexavalent chromium (Cr6+). Chromium enters the water from industrial waste. Hexavalent chromium is more toxic than trivalent chromium. Levels greater than 0.5 ppm indicate improperly treated industrial waste. It is important to maintain chromium levels at or below 0.5 ppm, because clams and other shellfish will store chromium in their systems, accumulating levels which may be dangerous to the consumer, whether human or animal. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHROMIUM, Hexavalent, Trivalent, Total Test Procedures 1 1 Drinking, surface, & saline water; domestic and industrial waste. RANGE: 0.00–1.00 ppm Chromium MDL: 0.01 ppm METHOD: The trivalent chromium is converted to hexavalent chromium by permanganate under acidic conditions. Hexavalent chromium reacts with 1,5 diphenylcarbohydrazide under acidic conditions to form a red-purple color in proportion to the amount of chromium present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analysis for chromium should be made as quickly as possible after sample collection since storage in glass or plastic containers may result in low chromate values. INTERFERENCES: High concentrations of mercurous and mercuric ions may interfere. Test Procedures APPLICATION: CHROMIUM, Hexavalent, Trivalent, Total SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 021 Chromium) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 021 Chromium from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with sample water. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one level measure of *Chromium Reagent Powder (V-6276). Cap and shake for one minute. Wait 3 minutes. 8. During the waiting period, fold a piece of filter paper in half, then in half again to form a cone. Push corners together to open end, and insert into funnel (0459). 9. At the end of 3 minute waiting period, filter sample into a clean tube (0290). Cap and mix. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. EXIT to exit to a previous menu TOTAL CHROMIUM WITH ACID DIGESTION PROCEDURE 1. Fill graduated cylinder (0418) to 50 mL line with sample water. Transfer to Erlenmeyer flask (0431). 2. Use the 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 5 mL (five measures) of *Sulfuric Acid, 5N (7681). Swirl to mix. NOTE: Highly buffered waters may require pH adjustment. Adjust the pH of highly buffered samples to 7.0 ±0.5. Continue procedure. 3. Place flask on burner or hot plate. Bring solution to a gentle boil. 4. Fill pipet (0341) with Potassium Permanganate, 0.5% (7682). While gently swirling flask, add Potassium Permanganate, 0.5% (7682), 2 drops at a time to boiling solution, until solution turns a dark pink color which persists for 10 minutes. Continue boiling. 5. Add one drop of *Sodium Azide, 5% (7683) to boiling solution. Boil for approximately 30 seconds. If pink color does not fade, add another drop of *Sodium Azide, 5%. Continue adding *Sodium Azide, 5% one drop at a time SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CHROMIUM, Hexavalent, Trivalent, Total Test Procedures 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. until pink color disappears. 6. Remove flask from heat. Cool sample under running water. This is the digested sample. 7. Pour digested sample into clean graduated cylinder (0418). Dilute to the 50 mL line with Deionized Water (5115). 8. Press and hold 9. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 10. Select ALL TESTS or another sequence containing 021 Chromium) from TESTING MENU. 11. Scroll to and select 021 Chromium from menu. 12. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with sample water. 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 14. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one level measure of *Chromium Reagent Powder (V-6276). Cap and shake for one minute. Wait 3 minutes. Test Procedures 15. During the waiting period, fold a piece of filter paper in half, then in half again to form a cone. Push corners together to open end, and insert into funnel (0459). 16. Filter sample into a clean tube (0290). Cap and mix. Insert tube of filtered sample into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 17. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu TRIVALENT CHROMIUM PROCEDURE Subtract hexavalent chromium from total chromium. Record as ppm trivalent chromium. Trivalent Chromium = Total Chromium – Hexavalent Chromium CHROMIUM, Hexavalent, Trivalent, Total SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COBALT PAN METHOD · CODE 4851 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL *Cobalt Buffer *4852-H 60 mL *Cobalt Indicator Reagent *4853-H 30 mL *Stabilizer Solution *4854-G 2 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 Pipet, 0.5 mL, plastic 0353 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Cobalt rarely occurs in natural water. It is used in the manufacture of alloys to increase corrosion resistance and strength. It is found in wastewaters as a corrosion by-product. Industrial wastewater. RANGE: 0.00–2.00 ppm Cobalt MDL: 0.04 ppm METHOD: PAN (1-[2-Pyridylazo]-2-Naphthol) forms a greenish complex with Cobalt (Co+2) at a pH of 5. SAMPLE HANDLING Store samples in acid-washed plastic bottles. Adjust & PRESERVATION: pH to less than 2 with nitric acid. Adjust sample pH to 5 before testing. INTERFERENCES: Iron (+2) and high concentrations of heavy metals. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COBALT Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 023 Cobalt) from TESTNG MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 023 Cobalt from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1 mL of *Cobalt Buffer (4852). Cap and mix. 9. Use the other 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1 mL of *Cobalt Indicator Reagent (4853). Cap and mix. 10. Wait 3 minutes. 11. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0353) to add 0.5 mL *Stabilizer Solution (4854). Cap and invert 15 times to thoroughly mix. Test Procedures 12. Wait 5 minutes. DO NOT MIX. 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm cobalt. 14. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. COBALT SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD – LOW RANGE MERCURY FREE DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 0072-SC MERCURY DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 0075-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 25 *COD Low Range Mercury Free Tubes *0072-SC or 25 *COD Low Range Mercury Tubes *0075-SC *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. COD Low Range Mercury Free Tubes are not USEPA approved. COD Low Range Mercury Tubes are USEPA approved. Equipment needed but not supplied: COD Adapter 5-0087 1 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 110V 5-0102 or 1 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 230V 5-0102-EX2 1 Measuring Pipet, 1.0 mL 2-2110 1 Pipet Bulb 2-2164 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is a measure of the amount of organic matter in water which is susceptible to oxidation by chemical oxidants. COD can be empirically related to the Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD) and organic carbon content of a specific source of water. This correlation must be determined experimentally for each source of water. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD, Low Range Test Procedures 1 Domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0–150 mg/L COD MDL: 7.5 mg/L METHOD: Dichromate in the presence of silver salts, at high temperature in a closed system, oxidizes most organic compounds to 95-100% of the theoretical amount. This process is called digestion. As dichromate oxidizes the organic compounds, the amount of yellow color is reduced. The remaining yellow color is measured colorimetrically at the 420 nm and is directly proportional to the COD of the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Collect samples in glass and test as soon as possible. If samples must be stored, preservation is accomplished by the addition of concentrated H2SO4 to adjust the pH below 2. Samples with suspended solids should be homogenized in a blender (100 mL for 30 seconds) and then stirred gently with a magnetic stirrer. INTERFERENCES: Volatile organic compounds are not oxidized to the extent that they are in the vapor above the digestion solution. Therefore, they do not contribute to the COD reading. Chloride concentrations above 10% of COD interfere with the mercury free tubes. Chloride above 2000 ppm will interfere with the mercury tubes. Nitrite gives a positive interference of 1.1 ppm O2 per ppm NO2–N which is insignificant unless nitrite concentrations are very high. Other reduced inorganic compounds are stoichiometrically oxidized, causing a positive interference. Corrections can be made for these compounds based upon their stoichiometry and concentrations. Test Procedures APPLICATION: When scanning samples in 16 mm tubes, such as COD, the sample chamber lid can not be closed. Use the COD adapter to minimize stray light interference. To further reduce stray light interference, do not scan sample in direct sunlight. COD, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Homogenize sample if necessary. 2. Preheat COD heater block to 150±2°C. 3. Remove cap from COD tube. Hold tube at a 45° angle. Use a volumetric pipet, to carefully add 2.0 mL sample water allowing the sample to run down the side of the tube. 4. Cap and mix thoroughly. 5. Rinse the outside of the tube with distilled water. Wipe dry with a paper towel. 6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 using 2.0 mL distilled water. This is the reagent blank. 7. Place tubes in preheated COD block heater and maintain temperature at 150±2°C for two hours. 8. At the end of the heating period turn the heater off. Wait 20 minutes for the tubes to cool to 120°C or less. 9. Remove tubes from block heater. Invert several times to mix. 10. Allow to cool to room temperature. 12. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 13. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 024 COD LR) from PROGRAMMED TESTS menu. 14. Scroll to and select 024 COD LR from menu. 15. Wipe the blank tube with a damp towel to remove fingerprints and smudges. Wipe with a dry towel. 16. Insert reagent blank tube into chamber. Select SCAN BLANK. 17. Remove tube from colorimeter. 18. Insert digested water sample tube into chamber. Select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. For the most accurate results, take three readings on each sample and average the results. 19. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: Reagents are light sensitive. Unused reagents should be stored in the shipping container, and in the refrigerator if possible, until needed. A reagent blank should be run with each set of samples and with each lot of reagents. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD, Low Range Test Procedures 11. Press and hold The reacted blank will be stable if stored in the dark. To eliminate error caused by contamination, wash all glassware with 20% sulfuric acid. For greater accuracy, a minimum of three repetitions should be performed and the results averaged. Test Procedures Some samples may be digested completely in less than two hours. The concentration may be measured at 15 minute intervals while the vials are still hot until the reading remains unchanged. The vials should be cooled to room temperature before the final measurement is taken. COD, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD – STANDARD RANGE MERCURY FREE DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 0073-SC MERCURY DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 0076-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 25 *COD Standard Range Mercury Free Tubes *0073-SC or 25 *COD Standard Range Mercury Tubes *0076-SC *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. COD Standard Range Mercury Free Tubes are not USEPA approved. COD Standard Range Mercury Tubes are USEPA approved. Equipment needed but not supplied: COD Adapter 5-0087 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 110V 5-0102 or 1 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 230V 5-0102-EX2 1 Measuring Pipet, 1.0 mL 2-2110 1 Pipet Bulb 2-2164 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is a measure of the amount of organic matter in water which is susceptible to oxidation by chemical oxidants. COD can be empirically related to the Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD) and organic carbon content of a specific source of water. This correlation must be determined experimentally for each source of water. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD, Standard Range Test Procedures 1 1 APPLICATION: Domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0–1500 mg/L COD MDL: 40 mg/L METHOD: Dichromate in the presence of silver salts, at high temperature in a closed system, oxidizes most organic compounds to 95-100% of the theoretical amount. This process is called digestion. As dichromate oxidizes the organic compounds, a green complex is formed. The concentration of the green complex is measured at 605 nm and is directly proportional to the COD of the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & Collect samples in glass and test as soon as PRESERVATION: possible. If samples must be stored, preservation is accomplished by the addition of concentrated H2SO4 to adjust the pH below 2. Samples with suspended solids should be homogenized in a blender (100 mL for 30 seconds) and then stirred gently with a magnetic stirrer. Test Procedures INTERFERENCES: Volatile organic compounds are not oxidized to the extent that they are in the vapor above the digestion solution. Therefore, they do not contribute to the COD reading. Chloride concentrations above 10% of COD interfere with the mercury free tubes. Chloride above 2000 ppm will interfere with the mercury tubes. Nitrite gives a positive interference of 1.1 ppm O2 per ppm NO2–N which is insignificant unless nitrite concentrations are very high. Other reduced inorganic compounds are stoichiometrically oxidized, causing a positive interference. Corrections can be made for these compounds based upon their stoichiometry and concentrations. When scanning samples in 16 mm tubes, such as COD, the sample chamber lid can not be closed. Use the COD adapter to minimize stray light interference. To further reduce stray light interference, do not scan sample in direct sunlight. COD, Standard Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Homogenize sample if necessary. 2. Preheat COD heater block to 150±2°C. 3. Remove cap from COD tube. Hold tube at a 45° angle. Use a volumetric pipet, to carefully add 2.0 mL sample water allowing the sample to run down the side of the tube. 4. Cap and mix thoroughly. 5. Rinse the outside of the vial with distilled water. Wipe dry with a paper towel. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 using 2.0 mL distilled water. This is the reagent blank. 7. Place tubes in preheated COD block heater and maintain temperature at 150±2°C for two hours. 8. At the end of the heating period turn the heater off. Wait 20 minutes for the tubes to cool to 120°C or less. 9. Remove tubes from block heater. Invert several times to mix. 10. Allow to cool to room temperature. 12. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 13. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 025 COD SR) from TESTING MENU menu. 14. Wipe the blank tube with a damp towel to remove fingerprints and smudges. Wipe with a dry towel. 15. Scroll to and select 025 COD SR from menu. 16. Insert reagent blank tube into chamber. Select SCAN BLANK. 17. Remove tube from colorimeter. 18. Insert digested water sample tube into chamber. Select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. For the most accurate results, take three readings on each sample and average the results. 19. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: Reagents are light sensitive. Unused reagents should be stored in the shipping container, and in the refrigerator if possible, until needed. A reagent blank should be run with each set of samples and with each lot of reagents. The reacted blank will be stable if stored in the dark. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD, Standard Range Test Procedures 11. Press and hold To eliminate error caused by contamination, wash all glassware with 20% sulfuric acid. For greater accuracy, a minimum of three repetitions should be performed and the results averaged. Test Procedures Some samples may be digested completely in less than two hours. The concentration may be measured at 15 minute intervals while the vials are still hot until the reading remains unchanged. The vials should be cooled to room temperature before the final measurement is taken. COD, Standard Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD – HIGH RANGE MERCURY FREE DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 0074-SC MERCURY DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 0077-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 25 *COD High Range Mercury Free Tubes *0074-SC or 25 *COD High Range Mercury Tubes *0077-SC *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. COD High Range Mercury Free Tubes and COD High Range Mercury Tubes are not USEPA approved. Equipment needed but not supplied: COD Adapter 5-0087 1 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 110V 5-0102 or 1 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 230V 5-0102-EX2 1 Measuring Pipet, 1.0 mL 2-2110 1 Pipet Bulb 2-2164 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is a measure of the amount of organic matter in water which is susceptible to oxidation by chemical oxidants. COD can be empirically related to the Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD) and organic carbon content of a specific source of water. This correlation must be determined experimentally for each source of water. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD, High Range Test Procedures 1 Domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0–15000 mg/L COD MDL: 400 mg/L METHOD: Dichromate in the presence of silver salts, at high temperature in a closed system, oxidizes most organic compounds to 95-100% of the theoretical amount. This process is called digestion. As dichromate oxidizes the organic compounds, a green complex is formed. The concentration of the green complex is measured at 605 nm and is directly proportional to the COD of the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & RESERVATION: Collect samples in glass and test as soon as possible. If samples must be stored, preservation is accomplished by the addition of concentrated H2SO4 to adjust the pH below 2. Samples with suspended solids should be homogenized in a blender (100 mL for 30 seconds) and then stirred gently with a magnetic stirrer. INTERFERENCES: Volatile organic compounds are not oxidized to the extent that they are in the vapor above the digestion solution. Therefore, they do not contribute to the COD reading. Contains mercury sulfate to prevent interference from chloride. Nitrite gives a positive interference of 1.1 ppm O2 per ppm NO2–N, which is insignificant unless nitrite concentrations are very high. Other reduced inorganic compounds are stoichiometrically oxidized, causing a positive interference. Corrections can be made for these compounds based upon their stoichiometry and concentrations. Test Procedures APPLICATION: When scanning samples in 16 mm tubes, such as COD, the sample chamber lid can not be closed. Use the COD adapter to minimize stray light interference. To further reduce stray light interference, do not scan sample in direct sunlight. COD, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Homogenize sample if necessary. 2. Preheat COD heater block to 150±2°C. 3. Remove cap from COD tube. Hold tube at a 45° angle. Use a graduated pipet, to carefully add 0.2 mL sample water allowing the sample to run down the side of the tube. 4. Cap and mix thoroughly. 5. Rinse the outside of the tube with distilled water. Wipe dry with a paper towel. 6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 using 0.2 mL distilled water. This is the reagent blank. 7. Place tubes in preheated COD block heater and maintain temperature at 150±2°C for two hours. 8. At the end of the heating period turn the heater off. Wait 20 minutes for the tubes to cool to 120°C or less. 9. Remove tubes from block heater. Invert several times to mix. 10. Allow to cool to room temperature. 12. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 13. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 026 COD HR) from TESTING MENU menu. 14. Wipe the blank tube with a damp towel to remove fingerprints and smudges. Wipe with a dry towel. 15. Scroll to and select 026 COD HR from menu. 16. Insert reagent blank tube into chamber. Select SCAN BLANK. 17. Remove tube from colorimeter. 18. Insert digested water sample tube into chamber. Select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. For the most accurate results, take three readings on each sample and average the results. 19. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: Reagents are light sensitive. Unused reagents should be stored in the shipping container, and in the refrigerator if possible, until needed. A reagent blank should be run with each set of samples and with each lot of reagents. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COD, High Range Test Procedures 11. Press and hold The reacted blank will be stable if stored in the dark. To eliminate error caused by contamination, wash all glassware with 20% sulfuric acid. Test Procedures For greater accuracy, a minimum of three repetitions should be performed and the results averaged. COD, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COLOR PLATINUM COBALT METHOD NO REAGENTS REQUIRED Color in water may be attributed to humus, peat, plankton, vegetation, and natural metallic ions, such as iron and manganese, or industrial waste. Color is removed to make water suitable for domestic and industrial use. Color may have to be removed from industrial waste before it is discharged to a waterway. Potable water and water with color due to natural materials. RANGE: 0–1000 color units MDL: 20 Cu METHOD: Color is determined by a meter that has been calibrated with colored standards of known platinum cobalt concentration. True color, the color of water in which the turbidity has been removed, is measured. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Collect all samples in clean glassware. Determine color as soon as possible to avoid biological or chemical changes that could occur in the sample during storage. INTERFERENCES: Turbidity will interfere. Filter before testing. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 Test Procedures APPLICATION: COLOR PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 027 Color) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 027 Color from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with color-free water (distilled or deionized water). Fill to 10 mL line with color-free water. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Empty tube. 8. Rinse tube with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with water sample. 9. Insert tube with sample water, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in color units. EXIT to exit to a previous Test Procedures 10. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. COLOR SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER – LOW RANGE BICINCHONINIC ACID METHOD • CODE 3640-SC QUANTITY 50 CONTENTS *Copper Tablets CODE *T-3808-H *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. The copper content of drinking water generally falls below 0.03 parts per million, but copper levels as high as 1.0 part per million will give water a bitter taste. Waters testing as high as 1.0 part per million copper have probably been treated with a copper compound, like those used in the control of algae, or have become contaminated from untreated industrial wastes. The addition of copper sulfate to lakes causes an increase in the copper content of the sediments. Acid waters and those high in free carbon dioxide may cause the corrosion or “eating away” of copper, brass and bronze pipes and fittings. This corrosion results in the addition of copper into the water supply. Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–3.50 ppm Copper MDL: 0.04 ppm METHOD: Copper ions form a purple complex with bicinchoninic acid around pH 6-7, in proportion to the concentration of copper in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING Copper has a tendency to be adsorbed to the surface & PRESERVATION: of the sample container. Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. If storage is necessary, 0.5 mL of 20% HCl per 100 mL of sample will prevent “plating out.” However, a correction must be made to bring the reaction into the optimum pH range. INTERFERENCES: High concentrations of oxidizing agents, calcium, and magnesium interfere. Silver can also interfere. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER, BCA, Tablet Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 028 Cu BCA Tablet) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 028 Cu BCA Tablet from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter and add one *Copper Tablet (T-3808). Cap and shake vigorously until tablet dissolves. Solution will turn purple if copper is present. Wait 2 minutes. 8. At end of 2 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. COPPER, BCA, Tablet SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER CUPRIZONE METHOD • CODE 4023 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 15 mL Copper A P-6367-E 15 mL *Copper B *P-6368-E *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. The copper content of drinking water generally falls below 0.03 parts per million, but copper levels as high as 1.0 part per million will give water a bitter taste. Waters testing as high as 1.0 part per million copper have probably been treated with a copper compound, like those used in the control of algae, or have become contaminated from untreated industrial wastes. The addition of copper sulfate to lakes causes an increase in the copper content of the sediments. Acid waters and those high in free carbon dioxide may cause the corrosion or “eating away” of copper, brass and bronze pipes and fittings. This corrosion results in the addition of copper to the water supply. Drinking, surface, and domestic waters. Pools and spas. RANGE: 0.00–2.50 ppm Copper MDL: 0.03 ppm METHOD: Copper ions form a blue complex with cuprizone, in a 1 to 2 ratio, at a pH of about 8, in proportion to the concentration of copper in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Copper has a tendency to be adsorbed to the surface of the sample container. Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. If storage is necessary, 0.5 mL of 20% hydrochloric acid per 100 mL of sample will prevent “plating out”. However, a correction must be made to bring the reaction into the optimum pH range. INTERFERENCES: Hg+1 at 1 ppm. Cr+3, Co+2, and silicate at 10 ppm. As+3, Bi+3, Ca+2, Ce+3, Ce+4, Hg+2, Fe+2, Mn+2, Ni+2 and ascorbate at 100 ppm. Many other metal cations and inorganic anions at 1000 ppm. EDTA at all concentrations. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER, Cuprizone Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 030 Cu Cuprizone) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 030 Cu Cuprizone from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter and add 5 drops of Copper A (6367). Cap and mix. 8. Add 5 drops of *Copper B (6368). Cap and mix. 9. Wait 5 minutes. Mix. 10. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 11. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. The reaction may stain the tubes. Scrub tubes thoroughly after each use. COPPER, Cuprizone SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER DIETHYLDITHIOCARBAMATE METHOD • CODE 3646-SC QUANTITY 15 mL CONTENTS *Copper 1 CODE *6446-E *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. The copper content of drinking water generally falls below 0.03 parts per million, but copper levels as high as 1.0 part per million will give water a bitter taste. Waters testing as high as 1.0 part per million copper have probably been treated with a copper compound, like those used in the control of algae, or have become contaminated from untreated industrial wastes. The addition of copper sulfate to lakes causes an increase in the copper content of the sediments. Acid waters and those high in free carbon dioxide may cause the corrosion or “eating away” of copper, brass and bronze pies and fittings. This corrosion results in the addition of copper into the water supply. Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–7.00 ppm Copper MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: Copper ions form a yellow colored chelate with diethyldithiocarbamate around pH 9-10 in proportion to the concentration of copper in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Copper has a tendency to be adsorbed to the surface of the sample container. Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. If storage is necessary, 0.5 mL of 20% hydrochloric acid per 100 mL of sample will prevent “plating out.” However, a correction must be made to bring the reaction into the optimum pH range. INTERFERENCES: Bismuth, cobalt, mercurous, nickel and silver ions and chlorine (6 ppm or greater) interfere and must be absent. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER, Thiocarbamate Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 031 Cu Thiocarbamate) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 031 Cu Thiocarbamate from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter and add 5 drops of *Copper 1 (6446). Cap and mix. Solution will turn yellow if copper is present. 8. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures NOTE: The reaction may stain the tubes. Scrub the tubes thoroughly after each use. COPPER, Thiocarbamate SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER – UDV BICINCHONINIC ACID METHOD–UNIT DOSE VIALS CODE 4314-J QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 1 Copper Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches 4314-J Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 The copper content of drinking water generally falls below 0.03 parts per million, but copper levels as high as 1.0 part per million will give water a bitter taste. Waters testing as high as 1.0 part per million copper have probably been treated with a copper compound, like those used in the control of algae, or have become contaminated from untreated industrial wastes. The addition of copper sulfate to lakes causes an increase in the copper content of the sediments. Acid waters and those high in free carbon dioxide may cause the corrosion or “eating away” of copper, brass and bronze pipes and fittings. This corrosion results in the addition of copper to the water supply. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER, UDV Test Procedures 1 Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.0–4.0 ppm Copper MDL: 0.1 ppm METHOD: Cupric ions form a purple complex with bicinchoninic acid around pH 6–7, in proportion to the concentration of copper in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Copper has a tendency to be adsorbed to the surface of the sample container. Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. If storage is necessary, 0.5 mL of 20% hydrochloric acid per 100 mL of sample will prevent “plating out”. However, a correction must be made to bring the reaction into the optimum pH range. INTERFERENCES: High concentrations of oxidizing agents, calcium, and magnesium interfere. Silver can also interfere. Test Procedures APPLICATION: COPPER, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 032 Copper UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 032 Copper UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to a Copper UDV vial (4314). 10. Wait 2 minutes. 11. Invert vial 3 times to mix. 12. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 13. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 COPPER, UDV Test Procedures NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting, or if air bubbles form, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder or bubbles. Mix. Test Procedures COPPER, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CYANIDE PYRIDINE-BARBITURIC ACID METHOD CODE 3660-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL Cyanide Buffer 2850PS-H 5g *Cyanide Cl Reagent *2794DS-C 5g *Cyanide Indicator Reagent *2793DS-C 15 mL *Hydrochloric Acid 1N *6130-E 15 mL *Sodium Hydroxide 1N *4004-E 2 Spoons, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Pipet, plastic, 1.0 mL 0354 1 pH Short Range Test Paper, pH 9–14 2955 1 Stirring Rod, Plastic 0519 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 CYANIDE Test Procedures The presence of cyanide in water has a significant effect on the biological activity of the system. Cyanides may exist in water in a variety of forms which vary in toxicity. Cyanide is a by-product of industrial waste from petroleum refining and plating. Low level concentrations in drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial waters. This method determines only those cyanides amenable to chlorination. RANGE: 0.00–0.50 ppm Cyanide MDL: 0.01 ppm METHOD: Cyanides react with a chlorine donor to form cyanogen chloride, which subsequently reacts with Pyridine and Barbituric Acid to form a red-blue compound in proportion to the amount of cyanide originally present. The concentration of the red-blue compound is determined spectrophotometrically. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Cyanide solutions tend to be unstable and should be analyzed as soon as possible. Samples can be stabilized by adjusting the pH to greater than 12 with NaOH. However, the pH will have to be readjusted to pH 10.5 before performing the test. INTERFERENCES: Oxidizing agents and aldehydes can react with cyanide, while reducing agents, such as sulfite, react with the chlorine donor; both can cause negative interferences. Thiocyanate and chloride both react as cyanide in this test and will give a positive interference. Color and turbidity can also interfere. Test Procedures APPLICATION: CYANIDE SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to selct TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 034 Cyanide) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 034 Cyanide from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Dip the end of plastic rod (0519) into water sample and touch it to a small piece (1/4 inch) of pH test paper (2955) to wet paper. Read pH immediately from color chart. a) If pH is below 10, raise the pH by adding *Sodium Hydroxide, 1N (4004) one drop at a time with stirring. Check pH after each drop with a new piece of pH test paper. Continue adjustment until pH is between 10.5 and 11.0. b) If pH is above 11.5, lower pH by adding *Hydrochloric Acid (6130) one drop at a time with stirring. Check pH after each drop with a new piece of pH test paper. Continue adjustment until pH is between 10.5 and 11.0. 7. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1.0 mL of Cyanide Buffer (2850PS) to tube. Cap and mix. 10. During the 30 second waiting period, carefully fill a second 0.1 g spoon (0699) with one level measure of *Cyanide Indicator Reagent (2793DS). 11. At the end of the 30 second waiting period, immediately add the level measure of *Cyanide Indicator Reagent (2793DS). Cap and shake vigorously for 20 seconds. Wait 20 minutes for maximum color development. 12. At the end of the twenty minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 13. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 EXIT to exit to a previous menu CYANIDE Test Procedures 9. Use one 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one level measure of *Cyanide Cl Reagent (2794DS). Cap and invert 10 times to mix. Wait 30 seconds. Test Procedures CYANIDE SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 CYANURIC ACID MELAMINE METHOD–TURBIDITY • CODE 366I-01-SC QUANTITY 2 x 100 mL 1 CONTENTS *Cyanuric Acid Test Solution Syringe, 5 mL CODE *4856-J 0807 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Cyanuric acid is added to swimming pool water as a stabilizing agent for free chlorine residuals. It minimizes the loss of chlorine from the action of ultraviolet rays in sunlight. Cyanuric acid levels in pools should be maintained between 25 and 75 ppm and various public health associations recommend that the concentration should never exceed 100-150 ppm. Swimming pool waters. RANGE: 5–200 ppm Cyanuric Acid MDL: 10 ppm METHOD: A buffered solution of melamine forms a precipitate with cyanuric acid in proportion to the amount of cyanuric acid present. The amount of particles in suspension is measured turbidimetrically. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Cyanuric acid samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. Deterioration of the sample can be minimized by keeping samples in the dark or refrigerated until analysis can be performed. INTERFERENCES: No known interference from compounds normally found in pool water. Temperature of the sample should be maintained between 70°F and 80°F for best results. Check for stray light interference (see p. 69). SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CYANURIC ACID, Liquid Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 035 Cyanuric Acid) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 035 Cyanuric Acid from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter and pour out water. Use a graduated cylinder or similar to measure 5 mL of sample water and pour into colorimeter tube. Test Procedures 8. Use the 5 mL syringe (0807) to add 5 mL of *Cyanuric Acid Test Solution (4856). Cap and mix thoroughly. A precipitate will form if cyanuric acid is present. Wait 1 minute. NOTE: This reagent bottle has a special fitting which enables the syringe to be inserted into the top of the bottle. With syringe in place, invert bottle and withdraw syringe plunger until 5 mL of reagent is contained in the syringe barrel. Remove syringe from reagent bottle and depress plunger to dispense into the tube. 9. At end of 1 minute waiting period, mix thoroughly, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For the most accurate results, the sample and reagents should be at 25 ±4°C. CYANURIC ACID, Liquid SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CYANURIC ACID – UDV MELAMINE METHOD-TURBIDITY–UNIT DOSE VIALS CODE 4313-J QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 1 Cyanuric Acid Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches 4313-J Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Cyanuric acid is added to swimming pool water as a stabilizing agent for free chlorine residuals. It minimizes the loss of chlorine from the action of ultraviolet rays in sunlight. Cyanuric acid levels should be maintained between 25 and 75 ppm and various public health associations recommend that the concentration should never exceed 100–150 ppm. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CYANURIC ACID, UDV Test Procedures 1 Swimming pool water. RANGE: 5–150 ppm Cyanuric Acid MDL: 10 ppm METHOD: A buffered solution of melamine forms a precipitate with cyanuric acid in proportion to the amount of cyanuric acid present. The amount of particles in suspension is measured turbidimetrically. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Cyanuric acid samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. Deterioration of the sample can be minimized by keeping samples in the dark or refrigerated until analysis can be performed. INTERFERENCES: No known interference from compounds normally found in pool water. Temperature of the sample should be maintained between 70°F and 80°F for best results. Check for stray light interference (see p. 17). Test Procedures APPLICATION: CYANURIC ACID, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to selct TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 036 Cyanuric UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 036 Cyanuric UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove vial from colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to a Cyanuric Acid UDV vial (4313). 10. Invert the vial 3 times to mix. 11. Wait 2 minutes. 12. Invert vial 3 more times to mix. 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 14. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 CYANURIC ACID, UDV Test Procedures NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting or air bubbles form, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder and bubbles. Mix. Test Procedures CYANURIC ACID, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 DISSOLVED OXYGEN WINKLER COLORIMETRIC METHOD • CODE 3688-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Manganese Sulfate Solution *4167-G 30 mL *Alkaline Potassium Iodide Azide *7166-G 30 mL *Sulfuric Acid 1:1 *6141WT-G 1 Sample Tube, screw cap 29180 1 Cap 28570 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: This method is applicable for the determination of dissolved oxygen in drinking water, all surface waters and wastewater. MDL: 0.6 ppm RANGE: 0.0–10.0 Dissolved Oxygen METHOD: This method uses the azide modification of the Winkler Method with a colorimetric determination of the yellow iodine produced from the reaction with the dissolved oxygen. INTERFERENCES: The presence of other oxidizing agents may cause positive interferences. Reducing may cause negative interferences. Nitrite interferences are eliminated with the azide modification. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 DISSOLVED OXYGEN Test Procedures Dissolved oxygen is vital to the survival of aquatic organisms. Naturally present, dissolved oxygen enters the water when plants photosynthesize. Wind and wave action also cause oxygen from the air to dissolve into water. Dissolved oxygen is consumed by aquatic animals and by the oxidation, or chemical breakdown, of dead and decaying plants and animals. The concentration of dissolved oxygen in natural waters can range from 0 to 14 ppm and is effected by temperature and salinity. COLLECTION & TREATMENT OF THE WATER SAMPLE Steps 1 through 4 below describe proper sampling technique in shallow water. For sample collection at depths beyond arm’s reach, special water sampling apparatus is required (e.g. the LaMotte Water Sampling Chamber, Code 1060; Model JT-1 Water Samplers, Code 1077; Water Sampling Outfit, Code 3103; or Water Sampling Bottle, Code 3-0026). 1. To avoid contamination, thoroughly rinse the screw cap Sample Tube (29180) with sample water. 2. Tightly cap Sample Tube and submerge to the desired depth. Remove cap and allow the Sample Tube to fill. 3. Tap the sides of the submerged tube to dislodge any air bubbles clinging to the inside. Replace the cap while the Sample Tube is still submerged. 4. Retrieve Sample Tube and examine it carefully to make sure that no air bubbles are trapped inside. Once a satisfactory sample has been collected, proceed immediately with Steps 5 and 6 to “fix” the sample. Test Procedures NOTE: Be careful not to introduce air into the sample while adding the reagents in steps 5 and 6. Simply drop the reagents into the sample. Cap carefully, and mix gently. 5. Add 2 drops of *Manganese Sulfate Solution (4167) and 2 drops of *Alkaline Potassium Iodide Azide (7166). Cap and mix by inverting several times. A precipitate will form. Allow the precipitate to settle below the shoulder of the tube before proceeding. 6. Add 8 drops of *Sulfuric Acid, 1:1 (6141WT). Cap and gently mix until the precipitate has dissolved. A clear-yellow to brown-orange color will develop, depending on the oxygen content of the sample. NOTE: It is very important that all “brown flakes” are dissolved completely. If the water has a high DO level this could take several minutes. If flakes are not completely dissolved after 5 minutes, add 2 drops of *Sulfuric Acid 1:1 (6141WT) and continue mixing. NOTE: Following the completion of step 6, contact between the water sample and the atmosphere will not affect the test result. Once the sample has been “fixed” in this manner, it is not necessary to perform the actual test procedure immediately. Thus, several samples can be collected and “fixed” in the field, and then carried back to a testing station or laboratory where the test procedure is to be performed. DISSOLVED OXYGEN SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 038 Disolved Oxygen) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 038 Disolved Oxygen from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with untreated sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. This tube is the BLANK. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Fill a second tube (0290) to the 10 line with the treated “Fixed” sample. This tube is the SAMPLE. 8. Remove BLANK from colorimeter, insert SAMPLE tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 DISSOLVED OXYGEN Test Procedures DISSOLVED OXYGEN SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 FLUORIDE SPADNS METHOD • CODE 3647-02-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 4 x 30 mL *Acid Zirconyl SPADNS Reagent *3875-G 2 x 30 mL *Sodium Arsenite Solution *4128-G 1 Pipet, 0.5 mL, plastic 0353 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Fluoride may occur naturally in some ground waters or it may be added to public drinking water supplies to maintain a 1.0 mg/L concentration to prevent dental cavities. At higher concentrations, fluoride may produce an objectionable discoloration of tooth enamel called fluorosis, though levels up to 8 mg/L have not been found to be physiologically harmful. NOTE: This procedure uses the EPA approved Reagent System for fluoride found in method 4500-F-D, 18th Edition of Standard Methods, pp. 1-27. Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial waters. RANGE: 0.00–2.00 ppm Fluoride MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: Colorimetric test based upon the reaction between fluoride and zirconium dye lake. The fluoride reacts with the dye lake, dissociating a portion of it into a colorless complex ion and dye. As the fluoride concentration increases, the color produced becomes progressively lighter. Samples may be stored and refrigerated in plastic containers. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: INTERFERENCES: The following substances produce a positive interference at the concentration given: Chloride (Cl–) Phosphate (PO4 –3) (NaPO3)6 SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 7000 mg/L 16 mg/L 1 mg/L FLUORIDE Test Procedures APPLICATION The following substances produce a negative interference at the concentration given: Alkalinity (CaCO3) 5000 mg/L Aluminum (Al ) 0.1 mg/L Iron (Fe ) 10 mg/L 3+ 3+ Sulfate (SO4 ) –2 200 mg/L Test Procedures Color and turbidity must be removed or compensated for in the procedure. Temperature should be maintained within 5°C of room temperature. FLUORIDE SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 040 Fluoride) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 040 Fluoride from menu. 5. This test requires a reagent blank. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with clear, colorless, fluoride free water. Fill to the 10 mL line with clear, colorless, fluoride free water. 6. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0353) to add 0.5 mL of *Sodium Arsenite Solution (4128). Cap and mix. 7. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2 measures of *Acid-Zirconyl SPADNS Reagent (3875). Cap and mix thoroughly. (This is the reagent blank.) 8. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 9. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample water. Repeat steps 7 and 8. 10. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 EXIT to exit to a previous menu FLUORIDE Test Procedures 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. Test Procedures FLUORIDE SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HARDNESS, TOTAL – UDV UNIT DOSE VIALS • CODE 4309-J QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 1 Calcium Hardness Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches 4309-J Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters; swimming pool water. RANGE: 0–450 ppm as CaCO3 Total Hardness MDL: 10 ppm METHOD: Calcium and magnesium react in a strongly buffered medium with an indicator to develop a pale purple color in proportion to the concentration. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. If storage is necessary, add 0.5 mL of 20 % hydrochloric acid per 100 mL of sample. However, the added acid will have to be neutralized with NaOH before testing. INTERFERENCES: Heavy metals will interfere. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HARDNESS, Total, UDV Test Procedures 1 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 043 Hardness UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 043 Hardness UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to a Calcium Hardness UDV vial (4309). 10. Shake vigorously for 10 seconds. 11. Wait one minute. Test Procedures 12. Invert vial 3 times to mix. NOTE: Firmly tap side of vial 5-10 times to remove all air bubbles. 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 14. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTES: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. HARDNESS, Total, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDRAZINE p-DIMETHYLAMINOBENZALDEHYDE METHOD CODE 3656-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 2 x 60 mL *Hydrazine Reagent A *4841-H 10 g *Hydrazine Reagent B Powder *4842-D 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 Spoon, 0.15 g, plastic 0727 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Hydrazine, N2H4, is added to the water in high pressure boilers to reduce corrosion by acting as an oxygen scavenger. Water and boiler water, industrial waste water. RANGE: 0.00–1.00 ppm Hydrazine MDL: 0.01 ppm METHOD: p-Dimethylaminobenzaldehyde reacts with hydrazine under acidic conditions to form a yellow color in proportion to the amount of hydrazine present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection due to the ease with which hydrazine becomes oxidized. Acidification of the sample may increase the time between collection and analysis. INTERFERENCES: The substances normally present in water do not interfere with the test, with the exception of strong oxidizing agents. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDRAZINE Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 045 Hydrazine) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 045 Hydrazine from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 4 mL of *Hydrazine Reagent A (4841). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 0.15 g spoon (0727) to add one measure of *Hydrazine Reagent B Powder (4842). Cap and shake vigorously for 10 seconds. Wait 2 minutes for maximum color development. An undissolved portion of Hydrazine Reagent B may remain in bottom of tube without adversely affecting results. Test Procedures 9. At the end of the 2 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. HYDRAZINE SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE – LOW RANGE DPD METHOD • CODE 3662-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Hydrogen Peroxide Reagent #1 *6452-G 100 *Hydrogen Peroxide LR Tablets *6454A-J 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Hydrogen peroxide, H2O2, is a colorless compound that is widely used as a bleaching or decolorizing agent in the manufacture of many commercial products. As an oxidizing compound it is also used in the treatment of sewage to reduce odors and corrosion due to hydrogen sulfide. It may also be used as a sanitizing agent for water treatment. Hydrogen peroxide is relatively unstable, and for this reason it dissipates quickly and leaves no residuals. Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial waste water. RANGE: 0.00–1.50 ppm Hydrogen Peroxide MDL: 0.02 ppm METHOD: Hydrogen peroxide reacts with an excess of potassium iodide through the action of a catalyst and buffer to release an equivalent amount of iodine. The iodine in turn reacts with diethyl-p-phenylenediamine (DPD) to produce a pink-red color in proportion to the iodine released. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Hydrogen peroxide is not stable in aqueous solutions. Exposure to sunlight and agitation will accelerate the reduction of hydrogen peroxide in dilute solutions. For best results start analysis immediately after sampling. INTERFERENCES: The likelihood of other oxidizing compounds interfering with this method is eliminated by the presence of hydrogen peroxide. Manganese may interfere and should be removed before analysis SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, Low Range Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 046 H Peroxide LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 046 H Peroxide LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill o the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter and add 4 drops of *Hydrogen Peroxide Reagent #1 (6452). Cap and mix. 8. Add one *Hydrogen Peroxide LR Tablet (6454A). Crush tablet with Tablet Crusher (0175). Cap and mix for 30 seconds. Solution will turn pink if hydrogen peroxide is present. Wait 5 minutes for full color development. 9. At the end of 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 10. Press to turn the meter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: For best possible results, a blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. For the most accurate results, the sample and reagents should be at 25 ±4°C. HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE – HIGH RANGE DPD METHOD • CODE 4045-01 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Hydrogen Peroxide Reagent #1 *6452-G 100 *Hydrogen Peroxide LR Tablets *6454A-J 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 1 Pipet, glass 0342 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Large quantities of hydrogen peroxide are added to a swimming pool to “shock” it. Shocking breaks down waste products and re-establishes a positive level of sanitizer. While many types of shock can be used with chlorine or bromine pools, only hydrogen peroxide can be used to shock biguanide pools. APPLICATION: Drinking, industrial, domestic and swimming pool waters RANGE: 0–80 ppm Hydrogen Peroxide MDL: 0.5 ppm METHOD: Hydrogen peroxide reacts with an excess of potassium iodide through the action of a catalyst and buffer to release an equivalent amount of iodine. The iodine in turn reacts with diethyl-p-phenylenediamine (DPD) to produce a pink-red color in proportion to the iodine released. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Hydrogen peroxide is not stable in aqueous solutions. Exposure to sunlight and agitation will accelerate the reduction of hydrogen peroxide in dilute solutions. For best results start analysis immediately after sampling. INTERFERENCES: The likelihood of other oxidizing compounds interfering with this method is eliminated by the presence of hydrogen peroxide. Manganese may interfere and should be removed before analysis SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, High Range Test Procedures Hydrogen peroxide, H2O2, is a colorless compound that is widely used as a bleaching or decolorizing agent in the manufacture of many commercial products. As an oxidizing compound it is also used in the treatment of sewage to reduce odors and corrosion due to hydrogen sulfide. It may also be used as a sanitizing agent for water treatment. Hydrogen peroxide is relatively unstable, and for this reason it dissipates quickly and leaves no residuals. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 047 H Peroxide HR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 047 H Peroxide HR from menu. 5. Use the pipet (0342) to add 5 drops of the sample water to a tube (0290). 6. Dilute to the 10 mL line with distilled or hydrogen peroxide-free water. 7. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove the tube from colorimeter and add 4 drops of *Hydrogen Peroxide Reagent #1 (6452). Cap and mix. 9. Add one *Hydrogen Peroxide LR Tablet (6454A). Crush tablet with Tablet Crusher (0175). Cap and mix for 30 seconds. Solution will turn pink if hydrogen peroxide is present. Wait 5 minutes for full color development. 10. At the end of 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 11. Press to turn the meter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: For best possible results, a blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. For the most accurate results, the sample and reagents should be at 25 ±4°C. HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE – SHOCK DPD METHOD • CODE 4045 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Hydrogen Peroxide Reagent #1 *6452-G 100 *Hydrogen Peroxide LR Tablets *6454A-J 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 1 Pipet, glass 0342 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Large quantities of hydrogen peroxide shock are added to a swimming pool to “shock” it. Shocking breaks down waste products and re-establishes a positive level of sanitizer. While many types of shock can be used with chlorine or bromine pools, only hydrogen peroxide shock can be used to shock biguanide pools. Swimming pools RANGE: 0–300 ppm Hydrogen Peroxide Shock MDL: 5 ppm METHOD: Hydrogen peroxide reacts with an excess of potassium iodide through the action of a catalyst and buffer to release an equivalent amount of iodine. The iodine in turn reacts with diethyl-p-phenylenediamine (DPD) to produce a pink-red color in proportion to the iodine released. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Hydrogen peroxide is not stable in aqueous solutions. Exposure to sunlight and agitation will accelerate the reduction of hydrogen peroxide in dilute solutions. For best results start analysis immediately after sampling. INTERFERENCES: The likelihood of other oxidizing compounds interfering with this method is eliminated by the presence of hydrogen peroxide. Manganese may interfere and should be removed before analysis SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, Shock Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select Testing Menu. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 048 H Peroxide Shock) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 048 H Peroxide Shock from menu. 5. Use the pipet (0342) to add 5 drops of the sample water to a tube (0290). 6. Dilute to the 10 mL line with distilled or hydrogen peroxide-free water. 7. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove the tube from colorimeter and add 4 drops of *Hydrogen Peroxide Reagent #1 (6452). Cap and mix. 9. Add one *Hydrogen Peroxide LR Tablet (6454A). Crush tablet with Tablet Crusher (0175). Cap and mix for 30 seconds. Solution will turn pink if hydrogen peroxide is present. Wait 5 minutes for full color development. 10. At the end of 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 11. Press to turn the meter off or press make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu or NOTES: For best possible results, a blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. For the most accurate results, the sample and reagents should be at 25±4°C. HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, Shock SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IODINE DPD METHOD TABLET • CODE 3643-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 100 *DPD #1 Instrument Grade Tablets *6903A-J 100 *DPD #3 Instrument Grade Tablets *6197A-J 15 mL Glycine Solution 6811-E 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 Like chlorine and bromine, iodine is an effective germicidal agent employed in drinking water treatment, pool and spa water sanitization, food service sanitation, and other public health applications. Drinking, surface, and saline waters; swimming pool water; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–14.00 ppm Iodine MLD: 0.15 ppm METHOD: In a buffered sample iodine reacts with diethyl-pphenylene-diamine (DPD) to produce a pink-red color in proportion to the concentration of iodine present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Iodine in aqueous solutions is not stable, and the iodine content of samples or solutions, particularly weak solutions, will rapidly decrease. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of iodine present in such solutions. For best results start analysis immediately after sampling. Samples to be analyzed for iodine cannot be preserved or stored. INTERFERENCE: The only interfering substance likely to be encountered in water is oxidized manganese. The extent of this interference can be determined by treating a sample with sodium arsenite to destroy the iodine present so that the degree of interference can be measured. Chlorine and bromine can give a positive interference, but these are not normally present unless they have been added as sanitizers. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IODINE, DPD, Tablet Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 050 Iodine) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 050 Iodine from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill tube to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add one *DPD #1 Tablet Instrument Grade (6903A). Cap and shake 10 seconds. Invert slowly 5 times. Solution will turn pink if iodine is present. Wait 15 seconds. Mix. 8. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. IODINE, DPD, Tablet SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IRON BIPYRIDYL METHOD • CODE 3648-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Iron Reagent #1 *V-4450-G 5g *Iron Reagent #2 Powder *V-4451-C 1 Pipet, 0.5 mL, plastic 0353 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–6.00 ppm Iron MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: Ferric iron is reduced to ferrous iron and subsequently forms a colored complex with bipyridyl for a quantitative measure of total iron. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: The sample container should be cleaned with acid and rinsed with deionized water. Addition of acid to adjust the sample to pH 2–3 will prevent deposition of iron on the container walls. Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible. INTERFERENCES: Strong oxidizing agents interfere, as well as copper and cobalt in excess of 5.0 mg/L. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IRON, Bipyridyl Test Procedures Most natural waters contain some iron. Its presence may vary from small traces to very large amounts in water which is contaminated by acid mine wastes. For domestic use, the concentration should not exceed 0.2 ppm and for some industrial applications not even a trace of iron can be tolerated. There are many means available for removing or reducing the iron content. Water softening resins are effective for removing small amounts of iron and special ion exchange materials are selective for iron removal. High concentrations of iron can be removed by such chemical processes as oxidation and lime or lime-soda softening. Because of the many means of removing or reducing the amount of iron in water, the particular method employed will depend largely on the form of iron which is present and the end use of the treated water. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 051 Iron Bipyridyl) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 051 Iron Bipyridyl from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0353) to add one measure of *Iron Reagent #1 (V-4450). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add 0.1 g of *Iron Reagent #2 Powder (V-4451). Cap and shake vigorously for 30 seconds. Wait three minutes for maximum color development. 9. At the end of 3 minute waiting period, DO NOT MIX. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. IRON, Bipyridyl SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IRON – UDV BIPYRIDYL METHOD–UNIT DOSE VIALS · CODE 4315-J QUANTITY 1 CONTENTS *Total Iron Unit Dose Vials, 20 pouches CODE *4315-J *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Most natural waters contain some iron. Its presence may vary from small traces to very large amounts in water which is contaminated by acid mine wastes. For domestic use, the concentration should not exceed 0.2 ppm and for some industrial applications not even a trace of iron can be tolerated. There are many means available for removing or reducing iron content. Water softening resins are effective for removing small amounts of iron and special ion exchange materials are selective for iron removal. High concentrations of iron can be removed by such chemical processes as oxidation and lime or lime-soda softening. Because of the many means of removing or reducing the amount of iron in water, the particular method employed will depend largely on the form of iron which is present and the end use of the treated water. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IRON, UDV Test Procedures 1 Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–10.00 ppm MDL: 0.05 ppm METHOD: Ferric iron is reduced to ferrous iron and subsequently forms a colored complex with bipyridyl for a quantitative measure of total iron. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: The sample container should be cleaned with acid and rinsed with deionized water. Addition of acid to adjust the sample th pH 2-3 will prevent depositation of iron on the container walls. Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible. INTERFERENCES: Strong oxidizing agents interfere, as well as copper and cobalt in excess of 5.0 ppm. Test Procedures APPLICATION: IRON, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 052 Iron-UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 052 Iron-UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into the chamber, close the lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove the vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to an *Iron UDV vial (4315). 10. Wait 2-3 minutes. 11. Invert vial 3 times to mix. 12. NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting, or air bubbles form, invert vial once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder or bubbles. Mix. 14. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IRON, UDV Test Procedures 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures IRON, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IRON I,I0-PHENANTHROLINE METHOD • CODE 3668-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 15 mL *Acid Phenanthroline Indicator *2776-E 5g *Iron Reducing Reagent *2777-C Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax.. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–5.00 ppm Iron MDL: 0.06 ppm METHOD: Ferric iron is reduced to ferrous iron and subsequently forms a colored complex with phenanthroline for a quantitative measure of total iron. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION The sample container should be cleaned with acid and rinsed with deionized water. Addition of acid to adjust the sample to pH 2–3 will prevent deposition of iron on the container walls. Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection since ferrous iron undergoes oxidation to ferric iron. INTERFERENCES: Strong oxidizing agents, cyanide, nitrite, and phosphates, chromium, zinc in concentrations exceeding 10 times that of iron; cobalt and copper in excess of 5 mg/L, and nickel in excess of 2 mg/L. Bismuth, cadmium, mercury, , and silver precipitate phenanthroline. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 IRON, Phenanthroline Test Procedures Most natural waters contain some iron. Its presence may vary from small traces to very large amounts in water which is contaminated by acid mine wastes. For domestic use, the concentration should not exceed 0.2 ppm and for some industrial applications not even a trace of iron can be tolerated. There are many means available for removing or reducing the iron content. Water softening resins are effective for removing small amounts of iron and special ion exchange materials are selective for iron removal. High concentrations of iron can be removed by such chemical processes as oxidation and lime or lime-soda softening. Because of the many means of removing or reducing the amount of iron in water, the particular method employed will depend largely on the form of iron which is present and the end use of the treated water. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 053 Iron Phenthro) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 053 Iron Phenthro from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290)with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL mark with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. Remove the cap and add 6 drops of *Acid Phenanthroline Indicator (2776). Cap and invert the tube 4 times to mix reagents. Wait five minutes for maximum color development. 8. After five minutes, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as ppm Ferrous Iron. Test Procedures 9. Remove the tube from colorimeter. Use the 0.1g spoon (0699) to add one measure of *Iron Reducing Reagent (2777). Cap and invert 15 times times to mix. Wait 5 minutes for maximum color delelopment. 10. After 5 minutes, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as ppm Total Iron. 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu 12. Total Iron (ppm) - Ferrous Iron (ppm) = Ferric Iron (ppm) NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. IRON, Phenanthroline SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 LEAD PAR METHOD · CODE 4031 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 250 mL *Ammonium Chloride Buffer *4032-K 15 mL *Sodium Cyanide, 10% *6565-E 30 mL *PAR Indicator *4033-G 30 mL 15 mL Stabilizing Reagent *DDC Reagent 4022-G *4034-E 1 Syringe, 5 mL, plastic 0807 2 Pipet, 0.5 mL, plastic 0353 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial wastewater. RANGE: 0.00–5.00 ppm Lead MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: Lead and calcium ions form a red complex with PAR (4- [2’-pyridylazo] resorcinol), at a pH of about 10. When sodium diethyldithiocarbamate is added, the lead/PAR complex is destroyed leaving the calcium/ PAR complex. The difference between the two measurements is due to the lead concentration. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analyze sample as soon as possible. If sample must be stored, acidify with nitric acid to a pH of below 2. INTERFERENCES: Calcium greater than 100 ppm (250 ppm CaCO3) will interfere. Low concentrations of cerium, iron, manganese, magnesium, sulfur, tin, and EDTA will also interfere. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 LEAD Test Procedures The average concentration of lead is 0.003 ppm in streams and less than 0.1 ppm in groundwater. Lead in a water supply may come from mine and smelter discharges or from industrial waste. Lead is used in the production of batteries, solder, pigments, insecticides, ammunition and alloys. Tetraethyl Lead has been used for years as an anti-knock reagent in gasoline. Lead may also enter water supplies when corrosive water dissolves pipes, plumbing fixtures and materials containing lead. Lead accumulates in the body and is toxic by ingestion. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 054 Lead) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 054 Lead from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. Empty the tube. Use the Syringe (0807) to add 5mL of sample to the tube. 8. Add 5 mL *Ammonium Chloride Buffer (4032) to fill the tube to the 10 mL line. Swirl to mix. 9. Add 3 drops *Sodium Cyanide, 10% (6565). Swirl to mix. 10. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0353) to add 0.5 mL *PAR Indicator (4033). Swirl to mix. Test Procedures 11. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0353) to add 0.5 mL Stabilizing Reagent (4022). Cap and mix. 12. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm as Reading A. 13. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add 3 drops *DDC Reagent (4034). Cap and mix. 14. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm as Reading B. 15. Calculate result: Lead (ppm) = Reading A - Reading B 16. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 LEAD MANGANESE – LOW RANGE PAN METHOD • CODE 3658-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 2x60 mL *Hardness Buffer Reagent *4255-H 30 mL *Manganese Indicator Reagent *3956-G 15 mL *Sodium Cyanide, 10% *6565-E 1 Pipet, 0.5 mL, plastic 0369 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax.. Manganese is present in ground water in the divalent state due to the lack of oxygen. In surface waters manganese may be in various oxidation states as soluble complexes or as suspended compounds. Manganese is rarely present in excess of 1 mg/L. It may cause an objectionable taste or cause staining problems in laundry, but manganese levels normally encountered in water seldom produce any health hazard. APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial wastewaters. RANGE: 0.00–0.70 ppm Manganese MDL: 0.01 ppm METHOD: PAN (1-[2-Pyridylazo]-2-Naphthol) forms a red complex with Manganese (Mn+2) at a pH of 10 to 11. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Manganese may oxidize readily in neutral water and precipitate from solution. It may adhere to or be absorbed by container walls, especially glass. Acidified samples can be stored in plastic. INTERFERENCES: None. Test is quite specific. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 MANGANESE, Low Range Test Procedures Manganese is removed from water by various means including chemical precipitation, pH adjustment, aeration, superchlorination and the use of ion exchange resins. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 055 Manganese LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 055 Manganese LR from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL (two measures) of *Hardness Buffer Reagent (4255). Swirl to mix. 8. Add 2 drops of *Sodium Cyanide, 10% (6565). Cap and mix. 9. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0369) to add 0.5 mL of *Manganese Indicator Reagent (3956). Cap and mix. 10. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. MANGANESE, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 MANGANESE – HIGH RANGE PERIODATE METHOD • CODE 3669-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 10 g Manganese Buffer Reagent 6310-D 15 g *Manganese Periodate Reagent *6311-E 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Spoon, 0.15 g, plastic 0727 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters, domestic and industrial wastewaters. RANGE: 0.0–15.0 Manganese MDL: 0.3 ppm METHOD: Periodate oxidizes soluble manganous compounds into permanganate. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Manganese may oxidize readily in a neutral water and precipitate from solution. It may adhere to or be absorbed by container walls, especially glass. Acidified samples can be stored in plastic. INTERFERENCES: Reducing substances capable of reacting with periodate or permanganate must be removed or destroyed before the periodate oxidation is attempted. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 MANGANESE, High Range Test Procedures Manganese is present in ground water in the divalent state due to the lack of oxygen. In surface waters, manganese may be in various oxidation states as soluble complexes or as suspended compounds. Manganese is rarely present in excess of 1 mg/L. It may impart an objectionable taste or cause staining problems in laundry, but manganese levels normally encountered in water seldom produce any health hazards. Manganese is removed from water by various means, including chemical precipitation, pH adjustment, aeration, superchlorination and the use of ion exchange resins. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 056 Manganese HR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 056 Manganese HR from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add two measures of Manganese Buffer Reagent (6310). Cap and mix until powder dissolves. 8. Use the 0.15 g spoon (0727) to add one measure of *Manganese Periodate Reagent (6311). Cap and shake for one minute. An undissolved portion of the reagent may remain in the bottom of the tube without adversely affecting the test results. Wait two minutes for maximum color development. Solution will turn pink if manganese is present. Test Procedures 9. At the end of the two minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. MANGANESE, High Range EXIT to exit to a previous menu SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 MERCURY TMK METHOD · CODE 4861 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 50 *TMK Tablets *4862-H 2 x 250 mL *Propyl Alcohol *4863-K 250 mL *Acetate Buffer *4864-K 1 Tablet Crusher 0175 1 Test Tube, 10 , glass, w/cap 0778 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 0.5 mL, plastic 0353 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial wastewater. RANGE: 0.00–1.50 ppm Mercury MDL: 0.01 ppm METHOD: Mercuric ions (Hg+2) form a colored complex with 4, 4’bis (dimethylamino) thiobenzophenone (Thio-Michler’s ketone, TMK) at pH 3. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analyze sample as soon as possible. If sample must be stored, treat with HNO3 to reduce th pH to less than 2 and store in a glass container. INTERFERENCES: Palladium and other noble metals (gold, platinum, rhodium, iridium, ruthenium), iodide and reducing agents such as hydroxylamine hydrochloride, ascorbic acid, sulfite and thiosulfate. Interference due to silver is eliminated if chloride is present. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 MERCURY Test Procedures Mercury occurs in small amounts in soil, streams and groundwater. It is used in the production of amalgams, mirror coatings and measuring devices such as thermometers, barometers and manometers. Pharmaceuticals and paints contain mercury. It is also used in fungicides and pesticides and as a mold retardant on paper. Some forms of mercury are very toxic and can accumulate in the aquatic food chain. PREPARATION OF *TMK INDICATOR NOTE: Prepare *TMK Indicator daily. Keep out of direct sunlight. 1. Fill test tube (0778) to the 10 mL line with *Propyl Alcohol (4863). 2. Add one *TMK Tablet (4862). 3. Use tablet crusher (0175) to completely crush tablet. 4. Cap and mix. Shake vigorously for 30 seconds. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 057 Mercury) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 057 Mercury from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. Test Procedures 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 3 mL of *Acetate Buffer (4864). Cap and mix. 9. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0353) to add 0.5 mL of prepared *TMK Indicator. Cap and mix. 10. Wait one minute. 11. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as ppm Mercury. 12. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure using distilled or deionized water. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank results from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is recommended that a reagent blank be determined each time *TMK Indicator is prepared. MERCURY SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 MOLYBDENUM – HIGH RANGE THIOGLYCOLATE METHOD • CODE 3699-03-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 2 x 30 mL *Mo Buffer *3997-G 2 x 30 mL *Molybdenum Oxidizing Reagent *6485-G 2.5g *Molybdenum Indicator Powder *6486-S 1 Spoon, 0.05g, plastic 0696 2 Pipets, 1.0 mL, plastic w/cap 0372 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Molybdenum occurs naturally in the earth’s crust as molybdenite and wolfenite, and is an important element in many biochemical reactions, including nitrogen fixation. In industrial processes, such as the operation of boilers and cooling towers, molybdenum, in the form of sodium molybdate, is used as a corrosion inhibitor. Boiler and cooling water. RANGE: 0.0–50.0 ppm Molybdenum MDL: 0.6 ppm METHOD: Calcium thioglycolate reacts with molybdenum to give a yellow color with an intensity proportional to the amount of molybdenum present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Molybdenum samples may be stored in either plastic or glass containers. INTERFERENCES: Nickel levels less than 50 ppm do not interfere; aluminum levels less than 10 ppm do not interfere; chromate at higher concentrations interferes due to the intense yellow color. Ferrous iron levels below 50 ppm do not interfere, but low levels of ferric iron will cause a large blank. Highly buffered samples may exceed the capacity of the system possibly producing inaccurate results. Samples with high levels of nitrite will eventually develop a pale orange color. Scan the sample immediately to avoid this inteference. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 MOLYBDENUM, High Range Test Procedures APPLICATIONS: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 061 Molybdenum HR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 061 Molybdenum HR from menu. 5. Fill clean tube (0290) to 10 mL line with sample water. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use a 1.0 mL pipet (0372) to add 1.0 mL of *Mo Buffer (3997). Cap and mix. 8. Use a second 1.0 mL pipet (0372) to add 1.0 mL of *Molybdenum Oxidizing Reagent (6485). Cap and mix. 9. Use 0.05 g spoon (0696) to add one measure of Molybdenum Indicator Powder (6486). Cap and mix until powder dissolves. Solution will turn yellow if molybdenum is present. Mix the tbe to remove bubbles. Test Procedures 10. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. MOLYBDENUM, High Range EXIT to exit to a previous menu SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NICKEL DIMETHYLGLYOXIME METHOD • CODE 3663-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL *Hydrochloric Acid, 2.5N *6251PS-H 30 g *Ammonium Persulfate Reagent *6566-G 30 mL *Silver Nitrate Solution, 0.0141N *6346WT-G 250 mL Sodium Citrate, 10% 6253-K 60 mL *Dimethylglyoxime, 1% *6254-H 60 mL *Ammonium Hydroxide, Conc. *6537-H 3 Pipets, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Test tube, 5-10-12.9-15-20-25, glass, w/cap 0608 1 Graduated Cylinder, 10 mL, glass 0416 Nickel is not usually found in natural waters except as a result of contamination from industrial wastewaters as a corrosion product of stainless steel and nickel alloys. Nickel may also enter surface waters from plating bath process water. APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial wastewater. RANGE: 0.00–8.00 ppm Nickel MDL: 0.15 ppm METHOD: Nickel under basic conditions forms a colored complex with dimethylglyoxime in proportion to the concentration of nickel. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Samples may be collected in either plastic or glass containers and preserved by adding 5 mL of concentrated nitric acid per liter. INTERFERENCES: Organic matter interferes. Cobalt, iron, copper, manganese and chromium do not interfere if each of the concentrations is below 15 ppm. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NICKEL Test Procedures *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. PROCEDURE 1. Use the 10 mL graduated cylinder (0416) to measure 10 mL of sample water. Pour into glass test tube (0608). 2. Use the 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 1 mL of *Hydrochloric Acid, 2.5N (6251). 3. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add 2 measures of *Ammonium Persulfate Reagent (6566). Add two drops of *Silver Nitrate Solution, 0.0141N (6346WT). Mix until the powder has dissolved. The solution will be slightly cloudy at this point. 4. Use 10 mL graduated cylinder (0416) to add 5 mL of Sodium Citrate, 10% (6253). 5. Use a second 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 1 mL of *Ammonium Hydroxide, Conc. (6537). Mix, then dilute to 25 mL with deionized water. 6. Use a third 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 1 mL of *Dimethylglyoxime, 1% (6254). Mix. Wait 20 minutes for color development. 7. At end of 20 minute waiting period fill a clean tube (0290) to the 10 mL line with the developed test sample. 8. Fill a second clean tube (0290) to 10 mL line with deionized water or untreated sample water. This is the blank. Test Procedures 9. Press and hold 10. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 11. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 063 Nickel) from TESTING MENU. 12. Scroll to and select 063 Nickel from menu. 13. Insert the blank into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 14. Insert test sample into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 15. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: It is strongly suggested that a reagent blank be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. NICKEL SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NITRATE ZINC REDUCTION · CODE 3689-SC QUANTITY 50 CONTENTS *Nitrate Spectrophotometric Grade Tablets 1 Tablet Crusher CODE *3881A-H 0175 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Nitrogen is essential for plant growth, but excessive amounts in water supplies can result in nutrient pollution. Nitrates, in conjunction with phosphate, stimulate the growth of algae creating water quality problems. Nitrogen compounds may enter water as nitrates or be converted to nitrates from agricultural fertilizers, sewage, industrial and packing house wastes, drainage from livestock feeding areas and manure. Nitrates in large amounts in drinking water can cause “blue baby syndrome” (methemoglobenemia) in infants in less than 6 months of age and other health problems. US Public Health Service Drinking Water Standards state that 44 ppm nitrate should not be exceeded. To the sanitary and industrial engineer, concentrations of less than 4 ppm are acceptable. Drinking, surface, and saline waters; domestic and industrial waters. RANGE: 0–60 ppm Nitrate MDL: Zinc is used to reduce nitrate to nitrite. The nitrite that was originally present, plus the reduced nitrate, reacts with chromotropic acid to form a red color in proportion to the amount of nitrite in the sample. METHOD: 5 ppm SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analysis should be made as soon as possible. If analysis cannot be made within 24 hours, the sample should be refrigerated at 4°C. When samples must be stored for more than 24 hours, add 2 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid per liter of sample. For best results, the analysis for nitrate should be determined at temperatures between 20°C and 25°C. INTERFERENCES: Nitrite interferes at all concentrations. Strong oxidizing and reducing substances interfere. Low results might be obtained for samples that contain high concentrations of copper and iron. SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 NITRATE, Tablet Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 065 Nitrate-TT) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 065 Nitrate-TT from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add one *Nitrate Spectrophotometric Grade Tablet (3881A-H). 9. Use Tablet Crusher (0175) to crush tablet. 10. Cap tube. 11. Invert tube 60 times per minute for 2 minutes (one inversion equals 180°). 12. Wait 5 minutes. Do not mix. Test Procedures 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm nitrate. 15. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press previous menu or make another menu selection. EXIT button to exit to a NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. To convert nitrate (NO3) results to nitrate-nitrogen (NO3-N), divide by 4.4. NITRATE, Tablet SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 NITRATE - UDV ZINC REDUCTION METHOD-UNIT DOSE VIALS •CODE 4321-J QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 50 Nitrate UDV 4321-J Equipment needed but not supplied: STANDARD ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1961 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Syringe, 3 mL, plastic 1184 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Or: ADVANCED ACCESSORY PACKAGE · CODE 1962 Pipettor, 3mL 30528 1 Pipet Tip (0-5 mL) 30695 1 Cuvette Rack 31695 1 Package of 3 Vials (empty) 0156 1 Foil Storage Bag 9467 Nitrogen is essential for plant growth, but excessive amounts in water supplies can result in nutrient pollution. Nitrates may enter the water from leaves or debris but other sources of nitrates include well water supplies, localized spraying of lawn or crop fertilizers, acid rain, bird droppings and bather wastes, urine and sweat. Nitrates, in conjunction with phosphate, stimulate the growth of algae creating water quality problems. Pools that are properly maintained usually do not have unexpected difficulty controlling algae, even in the presence of low levels of nitrates. Higher levels of nitrates can make algae control more difficult and increase the amount of chlorine required to maintain satisfactory control of algae. The only practical way to remove nitrates is to drain the water. Nitrates also cause problems in drinking water. Large amounts can cause “blue baby syndrome” (methemoglobenemia) in infants in less than 6 months of age and other health problems. SMART3 Test Procedures 1.11 NITRATE, UDV Test Procedures 1 swimming pools, drinking water, surface and saline waters RANGE: 0.00 – 80.0 ppm nitrate MDL: 2 ppm METHOD: Zinc is used to reduce nitrate to nitrite. The nitrite that was originally present, plus the reduced nitrate, reacts with chromotropic acid to form a red color in proportion to the amount of nitrite in the sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analysis should be made as soon as possible. If analysis cannot be made within 24 hours, the sample should be refrigerated at 4°C. When samples must be stored for more than 24 hours, add 2 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid per liter of sample. For best results, the analysis for nitrate should be determined at temperatures between 20°C and 25°C. INTERFERENCES: Nitrite interferes at all concentrations. Strong oxidizing and reducing substances interfere. Low results might be obtained for samples that contain high concentrations of copper and iron. Test Procedures APPLICATION: NITRATE, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 11,11 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing (066 Nitrate UDV) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 066 Nitrate UDV from menu. 5. Rinse a clean vial (0156) with sample water. 6. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to the vial. 7. Insert the vial into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove vial from the colorimeter. 9. Use the syringe (1184) to add 3 mL of sample to a Nitrate UDV vial (4321). 10. Shake vigorously for 30 seconds, then wait 3 minutes. 11. Invert vial once. 12. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 13. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. UDVs from opened pouches should be used promptly. Store unused vials from opened pouches in the Foil Storage Bag (9467) to extend the shelf life of the reagent. Generally, UDVs stored in the bag should be used within 10 days if the humidity is less than 50% and within 5 days if humidity is greater than 50%. The Foil Storage Bag contains a desiccant pack with indicator. When the indicator in the window turns from blue to pink, the bag should be replaced. SMART3 Test Procedures 1.11 NITRATE, UDV Test Procedures NOTE: If powder residue remains in the bottom of the vial after inverting, or if air bubbles form, invert once more and tap bottom of vial sharply once or twice to dislodge powder or bubbles. Mix. Test Procedures NITRATE, UDV SMART3 Test Procedures 1.11 NITRATE-NITROGEN – LOW RANGE CADMIUM REDUCTION METHOD • CODE 3649-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 2 x 60 mL *Mixed Acid Reagent *V-6278-H 5g *Nitrate Reducing Reagent *V-6279-C 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Dispenser Cap 0692 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. U.S. Public Health Service Drinking Water Standards state that 10 ppm nitrate nitrogen should not be exceeded. To the sanitary and industrial engineer, concentrations of less than 1 ppm are acceptable. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NITRATE NITROGEN, Low Range Test Procedures Nitrogen is essential for plant growth, but the presence of excessive amounts in water supplies presents a major pollution problem. Nitrogen compounds may enter water as nitrates or be converted to nitrates from agricultural fertilizers, sewage, industrial and packing house wastes, drainage from livestock feeding areas, farm manures and legumes. Nitrates in large amounts can cause “blue babies” (methemoglobinemia) in infants less than six months of age. Nitrate concentration is an important factor to be considered in livestock products, where, in addition to causing methemoglobinemia, it is responsible for many other problems. Nitrates in conjunction with phosphate stimulate the growth of algae with all of the related difficulties associated with excessive algae growth. Test Procedures APPLICATION: This method determines nitrate levels in drinking, surface, saline waters, domestic and industrial waters. RANGE: 0.00–3.00 ppm Nitrate Nitrogen MDL: 0.10 ppm METHOD: Powdered cadmium is used to reduce nitrate to nitrite. The nitrite that is originally present plus reduced nitrate is determined by diazotization of sulfanilamide and nitrite followed by coupling with N-(1 naphthyl)ethylenediamine dihydrochloride to form a highly colored azo dye which is measured colorimetrically. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analysis should be made as soon as possible. If analysis cannot be made within 24 hours, the sample should be preserved by refrigeration at 4°C. When samples must be stored for more than 24 hours, they can be preserved by adding 2 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid per liter of sample. For best results, the analysis for nitrate should be determined at temperatures between 20°C and 25°C. INTERFERENCES: Nitrite interferes at all levels. Strong oxidizing and reducing substances interfere. Low results might be obtained for samples that contain high concentrations of iron and copper. NITRATE NITROGEN, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE NOTE: Place Dispenser Cap (0692) on *Mixed Acid Reagent (V-6278). Save this cap for refill reagents. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 064 Nitrate-N LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 064 Nitrate-N LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter and pour off 5 mL into graduated cylinder or similar. Discard the remaining sample. 8. Pour the 5mL sample from a graduated cylinder or similar into the tube. Use the graduated cylinder or similar to measure 5 mL of *Mixed Acid Reagent (V-6278) and add to tube. Cap and mix. Wait 2 minutes before proceeding to Step 10. 9. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add two measures of *Nitrate Reducing Reagent (V-6279). Cap. NOTE: At end of waiting period an undissolved portion of Nitrate Reducing Reagent may remain in bottom of the tube without affecting results. 11. At the end of the 10 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 12. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. To convert Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3–N) results to ppm Nitrate (NO3–), multiply by 4.4. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NITRATE NITROGEN, Low Range Test Procedures 10. Hold tube by index finger and thumb and mix by inverting approximately 60 times a minute for four minutes. Wait 10 minutes for maximum color development. Test Procedures NITRATE NITROGEN, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NITRITE-NITROGEN – LOW RANGE DIAZOTIZATION METHOD • CODE 3650-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 2 x 60 mL *Mixed Acid Reagent *V-6278-H 5g *Color Developing Reagent *V-6281-C 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Dispenser Cap 0692 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Nitrite represents an intermediate state in the nitrogen cycle, usually resulting from the bacterial decomposition of compounds containing organic nitrogen. Under aerobic conditions bacteria oxidize ammonia to nitrites; and under anaerobic conditions, bacteria reduce nitrates to nitrites. Nitrites are often used as preservatives when added to certain foods. The nitrite concentration of drinking water rarely exceeds 0.1 ppm (mg/L). This method is applicable for the determination of nitrite in drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–0.80 ppm Nitrite-Nitrogen MDL: 0.02 ppm METHOD: The compound formed by diazotization of sulfanilamide and nitrite is coupled with N–(1–naphthyl)– ethylenediamine to produce a reddish-purple color, which is read colorimetrically. SAMPLE HANDLING Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible. They & PRESERVATION: may be stored for 24 to 48 hours at 4°C. INTERFERENCES: There are few known interfering substances at concentration less than 1000 times the nitrite-nitrogen concentration; however, the presence of strong oxidants or reductants may readily affect nitrite concentrations. High alkalinity (above 600 mg/L) will give low results due to a shift in pH. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NITRITE NITROGEN, Low Range Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE NOTE: Place Dispenser Cap (0692) on *Mixed Acid Reagent (V-6278). Save this cap for refill reagents. 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 067 Nitrite-N LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 067 Nitrite-N LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter and pour off 5 mL into a graduated cylinder or similar. Discard the remaining sample. Test Procedures 8. Pour the 5 mL sample from the graduated cylinder into the colorimeter tube. Use graduated cylinder or similar to measure 5 mL of *Mixed Acid Reagent (V-6278) and add to tube. Cap and mix. 9. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add two measures of *Color Developing Reagent (V-6281). Cap and mix by gently inverting for 1 minute. Wait 5 minutes for maximum color development. 10. At the end of the 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press EXIT button to exit to a previous menu or make another menu selection. NOTE: To convert nitrite-nitrogen (NO2–N) results to ppm nitrite (NO2–), multiply results by 3.3. NITRITE NITROGEN, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 NITROGEN, TOTAL CHROMOTROPIC ACID WITH PERSULFATE DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 4026-01 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 25 Total Nitrogen Hydroxide Reagent Tubes 4040-G 5g 60 mL *Digestion Reagent Powder Deionized Water *4036-C *5115PS-H 5g *Total Nitrogen Reagent A Powder *4041-C 30 *Total Nitrogen Reagent B Tablets *4042A-G 25 *Total Nitrogen Acid Reagent Tubes *4043-G 2 Spoon, 0.15 g, plastic 0727 4 Pipets, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 2 Funnels, plastic 0459 Note: for greater accuracy, use laboratory grade pipets. Equipment needed but not supplied: 1 COD Adapter 5-0087 1 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 110V 5-0102 or 1 COD Reactor, 12 tube, 230V 5-0102-EX2 1 Measuring Pipet, 1.0 mL 2-2110 1 Pipet Bulb 2-2164 1 Wipes 2-2069 1 Test Tube Holder 2-2190 Nitrogen is essential for plant growth, but the presence of excessive amounts in water supplies presents a major pollution problem. Nitrogen compounds may enter water as nitrates or be converted to nitrates from agricultural fertilizers, sewage, industrial and packing house wastes, drainage from livestock feeding areas, farm manures and legumes. Nitrates in large amounts can cause “blue babies” (methemoglobinemia) in infants less than six months of age. Nitrate concentration is an important factor to be considered in livestock products, where, in addition to causing methemoglobinemia, it is responsible for many SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 NITROGEN, Total Test Procedures *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. other problems. Nitrates in conjunction with phosphate stimulate the growth of algae with all of the related difficulties associated with excessive algae growth. Test Procedures U.S. Public Health Service Drinking Water Standards state that 10 ppm nitrate nitrogen should not be exceeded. To the sanitary and industrial engineer, concentrations of less than 1 ppm are acceptable. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, saline, domestic and industrial waters. RANGE: 3–25 mg/L Total Nitrogen MDL: 3 mg/L METHOD: All forms of nitrogen are converted to nitrate by an alkaline persulfate digestion. Interference from halogen oxides is eliminated by the addition of sodium metabisulfite. Nitrate reacts in acid with chromotropic acid to form a yellow color in proportion to the amount of nitrate in the treated sample. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: If the sample can not be analyzed immediately, the sample should be preserved by adjusting the pH to 2 or less with concentrated sulfuric acid and refrigerated at 4°C. Warm the sample to room temperature and neutralize with 5.0 N sodium hydroxide before analyzing. INTERFERENCES: Bromide (>60 ppm) and chloride (>1000 ppm) will have a positive interference. NITROGEN, Total SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Preheat COD reactor to 100 ±2°C. Follow safety precautions. 2. Remove caps from two *Total Nitrogen Hydroxide Reagent Tubes (4040). 3. Use a 0.15 g spoon (0727) and a funnel (0459) to add one level measure of *Digestion Reagent Powder (4036) to each tube. Tap funnel to dispense powder completely. 4. Use a 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of Deionized Water (5115PS), or organic-free water, to one tube. This is the blank. 5. Use another 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of sample to the other tube. This is the sample. 6. Cap both tubes and shake vigorously for 30 seconds. 7. Place the tubes in the COD reactor for 30 minutes. 8. After exactly 30 minutes, turn the reactor off. Carefully remove the tubes from the reactor and allow them to cool to room temperature. 9. At the end of the cooling period, press and hold ON button until colorimeter turns on. 10. Press and hold until colorimeter turns on. 12. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 069 Nitrogen Total) from TESTING MENU. 13. Scroll to and select 069 Nitrogen Total from menu. 14. Carefully remove caps from the digested tubes. 15. Use a 0.15 g spoon (0727) and a funnel (0459) to add one level measure of *Total Nitrogen Reagent A Powder (4041). Tap funnel to dispense powder completely. Cap the tubes and shake for 15 seconds. 16. Wait 3 minutes. 17. Remove the caps from the tubes. Add one *Total Nitrogen Reagent B Tablet (4042) to each tube. Cap the tubes and shake for 45 seconds or until the tablet disintegrates. 18. Wait 2 minutes. 19. Remove the caps from the reacted tubes. Carefully remove the caps from two *Total Nitrogen Acid Reagent Tubes (4043). CAUTION: Tubes contain a strong acid. 20. Use another 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2 mL of digested, treated blank to one Total Nitrogen Acid Reagent Tube. This is the blank. 21. Use another 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2 mL of digested, treated sample to SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 NITROGEN, Total Test Procedures 11. Press ENTER to select TESTING MENU. the other Total Nitrogen Acid Reagent Tube. This is the sample. 22. Cap the tubes and invert 10 times to mix. CAUTION: The tubes will be hot. Note: Invert slowly and completely for accurate results. Hold tubes with caps up. Invert the tube and wait for the air bubble to flow to the bottom of the tube. Turn the tube upright and wait for the air bubble to return to the top of the tube. This is one inversion. 23. Wait 5 minutes. 24. Wipe the tubes with a damp towel to remove fingerprints and smudges. Wipe with a dry towel. 25. Insert the blank tube into the chamber. Select SCAN BLANK. Remove the blank tube from the colorimeter. 26. Insert the sample tube into the chamber. Select SCAN SAMPLE. Record the result as Total Nitrogen in mg/L N. 27. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous Test Procedures NOTES: For greater accuracy, use laboratory grade pipets. To order reagent refills, Order Code R-4026. NITROGEN, Total SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 OXYGEN SCAVENGERS DEHA (DIETHYLHYDROXYLAMINE), CARBOHYDRAZIDE, ERYTHORBIC ACID, HYDROQUINONE, MEHTYLETHYLKETOXIME IRON REDUCTION METHOD · CODE 4857 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 15 mL *DEHA Reagent #1 *4791-E 15 mL *DEHA Reagent #2 *4792-E 15 mL *DEHA Reagent #3 *4793-E *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Oxygen can lead to corrosion in many parts of a boiler. Oxygen scavengers are added to the water to eliminate oxygen and thus decrease the chance of corrosion. Diethylhydroxylamine (DEHA) is a volatile oxygen scavenger used in boilers. It can also passivate steel and has a low toxicity. Test Procedures SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OXYGEN SCAVENGERS Boilers RANGE: 0.000–0.700 ppm DEHA (Diethylhydroxylamine) 0.000–0.900 ppm Carbohydrazide 0.00–3.00 ppm Erythorbic Acid 0.00–2.00 ppm Hydroquinone 0.00–3.00 ppm Methylethylketoxime MDL: 0.004 ppm DEHA 0.01 ppm Carbohydrazide 0.02 ppm Erythorbic Acid 0.01 ppm Hydroquinone 0.01 ppm Methylethylketoxime METHOD: Ferric iron is reduced to ferrous iron by oxygen scavengers in proportion to the concentration in the sample. The resulting ferrous iron reacts with an indicator to produce a purple color. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Analyze samples immediately. Rinse sample containers and glassware with 1:1 hydrochloric acid to avoid iron contamination. INTERFERENCES: Other oxygen scavengers, such as DEHA, carbohydrazide, erythorbic acid, hydroquinone and methylethylketoxime will interfere. Stray light and substances which complex iron or reduce ferric iron will also interfere. Test Procedures APPLICATION: OXYGEN SCAVENGERS SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 DEHA PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold until colorimeter turns on. 2. Press ENTER to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 037 DEHA) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 037 DEHA from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #1 (4791). Swirl to mix. 9. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #2 (4792). Swirl to mix. 10. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #3 (4793). Invert 3 times to mix. 11. Insert the tube into chamber. Close lid. 12. Wait 15 minutes. Do not open the lid during the waiting time. The reaction is photosensitive. 13. Remove tube from chamber. Invert 2 times to mix. 15. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OXYGEN SCAVENGERS Test Procedures 14. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Read within 30 seconds. Record result in ppm DEHA. CARBOHYDRAZIDE PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 013 Carbohydrazide) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 013 Carbohydrazide from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #1 (4791). Swirl to mix. 9. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #2 (4792). Swirl to mix. 10. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #3 (4793). Invert 3 times to mix. 11. Insert the tube into chamber. Close lid. 12. Wait 15 minutes. Do not open the lid during the waiting time. The reaction is photosensitive. Test Procedures 13. Remove tube from chamber. Invert 2 times to mix. 14. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Read within 30 seconds. Record result in ppm carbohydrazide. 15. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. OXYGEN SCAVENGERS SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 ERYTHORBIC ACID PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 039 Erythorbic Acid) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 039 Erythorbic Acid from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #1 (4791). Swirl to mix. 9. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #2 (4792). Swirl to mix. 10. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #3 (4793). Invert 3 times to mix. 11. Insert the tube into chamber. Close lid. 12. Wait 15 minutes. Do not open the lid during the waiting time. The reaction is photosensitive. 13. Remove tube from chamber. Invert 2 times to mix. 15. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OXYGEN SCAVENGERS Test Procedures 14. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Read within 30 seconds. Record result in ppm erythorbic acid. HYDROQUINONE PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 049 Hydroquinone) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 049 Hydroquinone from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #1 (4791). Swirl to mix. 9. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #2 (4792). Swirl to mix. 10. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #3 (4793). Invert 3 times to mix. 11. Insert the tube into chamber. Close lid. 12. Wait 15 minutes. Do not open the lid during the waiting time. The reaction is photosensitive. Test Procedures 13. Remove tube from chamber. Invert 2 times to mix. 14. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Read within 30 seconds. Record result in ppm hydroquinone. 15. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. OXYGEN SCAVENGERS SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 METHYLETHYLKETOXIME PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 058 Ketoxime) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 058 Ketoxime from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #1 (4791). Swirl to mix. 9. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #2 (4792). Swirl to mix. 10. Add 3 drops of *DEHA Reagent #3 (4793). Invert 3 times to mix. 11. Insert the tube into chamber. Close lid. 12. Wait 15 minutes. Do not open the lid during the waiting time. The reaction is photosensitive. 13. Remove tube from chamber. Invert 2 times to mix. 15. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OXYGEN SCAVENGERS Test Procedures 14. Immediately insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Read within 30 seconds. Record result in ppm methylethylketoxime. Test Procedures OXYGEN SCAVENGERS SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OZONE DPD METHOD • CODE 4881 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL DPD #1A Free Chlorine Reagent P-6740-G 30 mL *DPD #1B Free Chlorine Reagent *P-6741-G 30 mL *DPD #3 Total Chlorine Reagent *P-6743-G 2 x 15 mL Glycine Solution 6811-E *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Note: The primary use for this kit is in applications that use only ozone and no other oxidizing disinfectants. Ozone is sometimes used in place of, or in conjunction with, chlorine or other halogens for disinfection of pool, spa or drinking waters. Recently, large aquatic facilities have begun using ozone as a disinfectant in many artificial habitats. Bottled water, aquatic waters, and non-chlorinated waters. RANGE: 0.00 – 3.00 mg/L Ozone MDL: 0.03 mg/L METHOD: In the presence of iodide, ozone reacts instantly with the buffered diethyl-p-phenylenediamine indicator (DPD) to produce a red color in proportion to the amount of ozone present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Ozone in aqueous solutions, particularly weak solutions, is not stable. Exposure to sunlight or agitation will accelerate the reduction of ozone. Fill sample containers to the top and cap tightly. Analyze samples as soon as possible after collection. INTERFERENCES: Interferences are other oxidizers, such as, chlorine, bromine, iodine, and oxidized manganese. The DPD reagent system used in this kit has a significant interference from chlorine. The interference from chlorine only is eliminated with the addition of glycine. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OZONE, DPD, Liquid Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE - OZONE ONLY 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 070 Ozone DPD) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 070 Ozone DPD from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 5 drops *DPD #3 Total Chlorine Reagent (6743). Swirl to mix. 9. Add 5 drops DPD #1 A Free Chlorine Reagent (6740) and 5 drops *DPD #1B Free Chlorine Reagent (6741). 10. Cap and invert to mix. Make reading within 30 seconds. 11. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as mg/L ozone. Test Procedures 12. Press to turn the meter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: For best possible results, a blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. OZONE, DPD, Liquid SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE - OZONE WITH CHLORINE PRESENT 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 070 Ozone DPD) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 070 Ozone DPD from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. 8. Add 5 drops *DPD #3 Total Chlorine Reagent (6743). Swirl to mix. 9. Add 5 drops DPD #1 A Free Chlorine Reagent (6740) and 5 drops *DPD #1B Free Chlorine Reagent (6741). 10. Cap and invert to mix. Make reading within 30 seconds. 11. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as Reading A (ozone + total chlorine). 12. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL with sample. 13. Add 5 drops of Glycine Solution (6811). Swirl to mix. 15. Add 5 drops DPD #1 A Free Chlorine Reagent (6740) and 5 drops *DPD #1B Free Chlorine Reagent (6741). 16. Cap and invert to mix. Make reading within 30 seconds. 17. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result as Reading B (ozone). 18. Calculate the ozone concentration in mg/L ozone. Reading A – Reading B = mg/L ozone 19. Press to turn the meter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: For best possible results, a blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OZONE, DPD, Liquid Test Procedures 14. Add 5 drops *DPD #3 Total Chlorine Reagent (6743). Swirl to mix. Test Procedures OZONE, DPD, Liquid SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OZONE INDIGO METHOD • CODE 365I-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 15 mL Chlorine Inhibitor 3990-E 250 mL *Ozone Buffer *3991-K 30 mL Indigo Blue Stock Solution 3989-G 1 Sampling Apparatus 0681 1 Pipet, transfer, 1.0 mL 2-2170 1 Pipet, transfer, 5 mL 0329 1 Pump, 10 mL 30527 1 Bottle, HR Reagent, amber glass 0680-J 1 Graduated Cylinder, 50 mL, glass 0418 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking, pool and aquatic waters. RANGE: 0.00–0.40 ppm Ozone, Low Range 0.00–3.00 ppm Ozone, High Range MDL: 0.02 ppm Ozone, Low Range 0.05 ppm Ozone, High Range METHOD: Ozone rapidly and stoichiometrically decolorizes Indigo Trisulfonate under acidic conditions. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Ozone is extremely unstable in aqueous solutions. Test must be performed immediately and the sample must not be agitated. INTERFERENCES: Manganese at any level interferes. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OZONE, Indigo Test Procedures Ozone is sometimes used in place of, or in conjunction with, chlorine or other halogens for disinfection of pool, spa, or drinking waters. Recently, large aquatic facilities have begun using ozone as a disinfectant in many artificial habitats. PROCEDURE–LOW RANGE A. PREPARATION OF HR REAGENT NOTE: The quantity of Indigo Blue Stock solution (3989) supplied will prepare one batch of HR Reagent for the High Range Ozone procedure or five batches of HR Reagent for the Low Range Ozone procedure. 1. Use the 50 mL graduated cylinder to carefully add 45 mL of *Ozone Buffer (3991) to amber glass bottle marked HR Reagent (0680). 2. Use the 5 mL transfer pipet (0329) and pump (30527) to add 5 mL of Indigo Blue Stock Solution (3989) to the amber glass bottle. Cap and mix. B. DETERMINATION OF OZONE 3. Use the 1.0 mL transfer pipet (2-2170) and pump (30527) to add 1.0 mL of HR Reagent to each of 2 clean tubes (0290). 4. If chlorine is present add 3 drops Chlorine Inhibitor (3990) to each tube. Cap tubes. 5. Take one of the prepared tubes (0290) and sampling apparatus (0681) to sampling site. Test Procedures 6. Lower end of tubing of sampling apparatus to desired depth. Slowly withdraw and depress plunger several times to purge syringe and tubing. Slowly withdraw plunger to fill purged syringe. 7. Remove plastic tubing from syringe. Remove cap from the prepared tube. Place tip of syringe against inside of the prepared tube. Slowly depress plunger and fill to the 10 mL line and cap. This is the Sample Tube. NOTE: DO NOT SHAKE OR INVERT THE SAMPLE. 8. Fill the second prepared tube (0290) to the 10 mL line with ozone free water. This is the Reagent Blank. 9. Press and hold 10. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 11. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 071 Ozone LR) from TESTING MENU. 12. Scroll to and select 071 Ozone LR from menu. 13. Insert the Reagent Blank tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 14. Insert reacted Sample Tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 15. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: HR Reagent must be made fresh each week. If reagent is refrigerated, it may be kept up to 3 weeks. OZONE, Indigo SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE–HIGH RANGE A. PREPARATION OF HR REAGENT NOTE: The quantity of Indigo Blue Stock solution (3989) supplied will prepare one batch of HR Reagent for the High Range Ozone procedure or five batches of HR Reagent for the Low Range Ozone procedure. 1. Use the 50 mL graduated cylinder to carefully add 25 mL of *Ozone Buffer (3991) to amber glass bottle marked HR Reagent (0680). 2. Use the 50 mL graduated cylinder to carefully add 25 mL of Indigo Blue Stock Solution (3989) to the amber glass bottle. Cap and mix. B. DETERMINATION OF OZONE 3. Use the 1.0 mL transfer pipet (2-2170) and pump (30527) to add 1.0 mL of HR Reagent to each of 2 clean tubes (0290). 4. If chlorine is present add 3 drops Chlorine Inhibitor (3990) to each tube. Cap tubes. 5. Take one of the prepared tubes (0290) and sampling apparatus (0681) to sampling site. 6. Lower end of tubing of sampling apparatus to desired depth. Slowly withdraw and depress plunger several times to purge syringe and tubing. Slowly withdraw plunger to fill purged syringe. 8. Fill the second prepared tube (0290) to the 10 mL line with ozone free water. This is the Reagent Blank. 9. Press and hold 10. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 11. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 072 Ozone HR) from TESTING MENU. 12. Scroll to and select 072 Ozone HR from menu. 13. Insert the Reagent Blank tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 14. Insert reacted Sample Tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 15. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: HR Reagent must be made fresh each week. If reagent is refrigerated, it may be kept up to 3 weeks. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 OZONE, Indigo Test Procedures 7. Remove plastic tubing from syringe. Remove cap from the prepared tube. Place tip of syringe against inside of the prepared tube. Slowly depress plunger and fill to the 10 mL line and cap. This is the Sample Tube. NOTE: DO NOT SHAKE OR INVERT THE SAMPLE. Test Procedures OZONE, Indigo SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 pH COLORIMETRIC METHOD • CODE 3700-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL Chlorphenol Red Indicator V-2209-H 60 mL Phenol Red Indicator V-2304-H 60 mL Thymol Blue Indicator V-2213-H 3 Pipets, 0.5 mL, plastic w/caps 0369 The term pH (always written with a lower case p and an upper case H) is correctly defined as the negative logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration. More simply, the term pH can be considered to be an index of the amount of hydrogen ion present in a substance, or is a measure of the acidity of the substance. This index is important as it can be used to quickly identify the acid, neutral or alkaline (basic) nature of materials. Acidic substances have a pH less than 7.0, neutral substances have a pH equal to 7.0 and alkaline substances have a pH greater than 7.0. Waters more acidic than pH 5.0 and more alkaline than pH 8.5 to 9.0 should be viewed with suspicion. Mine drainage and acidic industrial wastes are the principal factors in increasing the acidity of water, and alkaline industrial wastes are the cause of high pH values. Because pH measurements can be made so simply, and because they can tell so much about the past and future reactions of water, they are routinely made in water quality studies. Sudden changes in pH values serve as warning signals that water quality may be adversely affected through the introduction of contaminants. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 pH Test Procedures Most natural waters have pH values from pH 5.0 to pH 8.5. Acidic, freshly fallen rain water may have a pH value of pH 5.5 to pH 6.0. When it reacts with soils and minerals containing weakly alkaline materials, the hydroxyl ion concentration will increase and the hydrogen ion concentration will decrease. Then the water may become slightly alkaline with a pH of 8.0 to 8.5. Natural sea water has a pH value of 8.1, and changes from this value indicate that water from an inland source is entering the body of sea water. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface, and saline waters, swimming pool water; domestic and industrial wastes. METHOD: The various pH indicators exhibit a specific color change over a narrow pH range. The color changes are measured colorime trically. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Sample should be analyzed immediately after collection. INTERFERENCES: Sample color and turbidity interfere with the colorimetric pH measurement. Color interference may be removed bystandardizing the instrument with the original water sample. Two drops of 0.1N sodium thiosulfate per 100 mL of sample will eliminate chlorine interference. INDICATOR, RANGE, pH Indicator & TEST NAME: pH 073 pH CPR 074 pH PR 075 pH TB Test Procedures Chlorphenol Red 5.0-6.8 Phenol Red 6.6-8.4 Thymol Blue 8.0-9.6 SMART3 Test Name pH SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE 1. Use Indicator, Range, & Test Name chart to select the indicator, corresponding to anticipated pH range and to determine corresponding test name to select from colorimeter menu. 2. Press and hold 3. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 4. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing the appropriate pH test name) from TESTING MENU. 5. Scroll to and select the appropriate pH test name from menu. 6. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 7. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 8. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0369) to add exactly 0.5 mL of the pH indicator for the chosen range. Cap and mix. 9. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 pH Test Procedures pH SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHENOL AMINOANTIPYRINE METHOD • CODE 3652-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 5g Aminoantipyrine Reagent 7825-C 30 mL *Ammonium Hydroxide Solution *7826-G 2 x 60 mL *Potassium Ferricyanide Solution *7827-H 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Pipet, plain, plastic 0352 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Phenols may occur in domestic and industrial waste waters and in drinking water supplies. Chlorination of waters containing phenols may produce odiferous and objectionable tasting chlorophenols. Natural waters sedom contain more than 1 mg/L phenol. Drinking and surface waters; domestic and industrial waste water. RANGE: 0.00–6.00 ppm Phenol MDL: 0.05 ppm METHOD: 4-Aminoantipyrine is oxidized in the presence of all ortho- and meta- substituted phenols to form a colored complex in proportion to the amount of phenol present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Phenols are subject to biological and chemical oxidation. Samples should be analyzed within 4 hours after collection. If sample cannot be analyzed within 4 hours, it can be preserved by acidification with phosphoric acid to pH 4.0. INTERFERENCES: Oxidizing and reducing chemicals, alkaline pH values, and phenol decomposing bacteria may interfere with the test. SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 PHENOL Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 077 Phenol) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 077 Phenol from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one measure of Aminoantipyrine Reagent (7825-C). Cap and mix. 8. Use the plain pipet (0352) to add 4 drops of *Ammonium Hydroxide Solution (7826). Cap and mix. 9. Use the 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 2 mL of *Potassium Ferricyanide Solution (7827). Cap and mix. Solution will almost immediately develop a reddish hue if phenols are present. Test Procedures 10. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. PHENOL EXIT to exit to a previous menu SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 PHOSPHATE – LOW RANGE ASCORBIC ACID REDUCTION METHOD CODE 3653-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL *Phosphate Acid Reagent *V-6282-H 5g *Phosphate Reducing Reagent *V-6283-C 1 Pipet, 1 mL, plastic 0354 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHATE, Low Range Test Procedures Phosphorus is an important nutrient for aquatic plants. The amount found in water is generally not more than 0.1 ppm unless the water has become polluted from waste water sources or excessive drainage from agricultural areas. When phosphorus is present in excess of the concentrations required for normal aquatic plant growth, a process called eutrophication takes place. This creates a favorable environment for the increase in algae and weeds. When algae cells die, oxygen is used in the decomposition and fish kills often result. Rapid decomposition of dense algae scums with associated organisms give rise to foul odors and hydrogen sulfide gas. Test Procedures APPLICATION: Drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes (Method based on reactions that are specific for orthophosphate). RANGE: 0.00–3.00 ppm Orthophosphate MDL: 0.05 ppm METHOD: Ammonium molybdate and antimony potassium tartrate react in a filtered acid medium with dilute solution of PO4–3 to form an antimonyphosphomolybdate complex. This complex is reduced to an intense blue colored complex by ascorbic acid. The color is proportional to the amount of phosphate present. (Only orthophosphate forms a blue color in this test.) Polyphosphates (and some organic phosphorus compounds) may be converted to the orthophosphate form by sulfuric acid digestion. Organic phosphorus compounds may be converted to the orthophosphate form by persulfate digestion. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: If benthic deposits are present in the area being sampled, great care should be taken not to include these deposits. If the analysis cannot be performed the same day of collection, the sample should be preserved by the addition of 2 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid or 40 mg mercuric chloride per liter and refrigerated at 4°C. INTERFERENCES: a. No interference from copper, iron, or silicate at concentrations many times the concentration of sea water. However, high iron concentrations can cause precipitation and subsequent loss of phosphorus. b. Salt error for samples ranging from 5% to 20% salt content was found to be less than 1%. c. Mercuric chloride, HgCl2, when used as the preservative, interferes when the chloride levels are low (less than 50 mg/L). This interference is overcome by spiking samples with a minimum of 50 mg/L of sodium chloride. PHOSPHATE, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 078 Phosphate LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 078 Phosphate LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1.0 mL of *Phosphate Acid Reagent (V-6282). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one measure of *Phosphate Reducing Reagent (V-6283). Cap and mx until powder dissolves. Wait 5 minutes for full color development. Solution will turn blue if phosphates are present. 9. At end of 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHATE, High Range Test Procedures PHOSPHATE, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHATE – HIGH RANGE VANADOMOLYBDOPHOSPHORIC ACID METHOD CODE 3655-SC QUANTITY 4 x 30 mL 1 CONTENTS CODE *VM Phosphate Reagent *4410-G Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Phosphate treatments in boiler and cooling water and other industrial water systems are run at levels up to 100 ppm orthophosphate. These high levels permit the use of a simpler, high range test. Boiler, cooling, and industrial water. RANGE: 0.0–70.0 ppm Phosphate MDL: 0.5 ppm METHOD: Orthophosphate reacts in acid conditions with ammonium vanadomolybdate to form vanadomolybdophosphoric acid. This yellow color is proportional to the concentration of orthophosphate and is read colorimetrically. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: If the analysis cannot be performed the same day of collection, the sample should be preserved by the addition of 2 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid or 40 mg mercuric chloride per liter and refrigerated at 4°C. INTERFERENCES: Silica interferes only if the sample is heated. Arsenate, fluoride, thorium, bismuth, sulfide, thiosulfate, and thiocyanate cause negative interference. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHATE, High Range Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 079 Phosphate HR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 079 Phosphate HR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of *VM Phosphate Reagent (4410). Cap and mix. Wait 5 minutes for full color development. 8. After 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. PHOSPHATE, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHATE ppb ASCORBIC ACID REDUCTION METHOD CODE 3653-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 60 mL *Phosphate Acid Reagent *V-6282-H 5g *Phosphate Reducing Reagent *V-6283-C 1 Pipet, 1 mL, plastic 0354 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHATE, ppb Test Procedures Phosphorus is an important nutrient for aquatic plants. The amount found in water is generally not more than 0.1 ppm unless the water has become polluted from waste water sources or excessive drainage from agricultural areas. When phosphorus is present in excess of the concentrations required for normal aquatic plant growth, a process called eutrophication takes place. This creates a favorable environment for the increase in algae and weeds. When algae cells die, oxygen is used in the decomposition and fish kills often result. Rapid decomposition of dense algae scums with associated organisms give rise to foul odors and hydrogen sulfide gas. Test Procedures APPLICATION: Drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes (Method based on reactions that are specific for orthophosphate). RANGE: 0–3000 ppm Orthophosphate MDL: 50 ppb METHOD: Ammonium molybdate and antimony potassium tartrate react in a filtered acid medium with dilute solution of PO4–3 to form an antimonyphosphomolybdate complex. This complex is reduced to an intense blue colored complex by ascorbic acid. The color is proportional to the amount of phosphate present. (Only orthophosphate forms a blue color in this test.) Polyphosphates (and some organic phosphorus compounds) may be converted to the orthophosphate form by sulfuric acid digestion. Organic phosphorus compounds may be converted to the orthophosphate form by persulfate digestion. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: If benthic deposits are present in the area being sampled, great care should be taken not to include these deposits. If the analysis cannot be performed the same day of collection, the sample should be preserved by the addition of 2 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid or 40 mg mercuric chloride per liter and refrigerated at 4°C. INTERFERENCES: a. No interference from copper, iron, or silicate at concentrations many times the concentration of sea water. However, high iron concentrations can cause precipitation and subsequent loss of phosphorus. b. Salt error for samples ranging from 5% to 20% salt content was found to be less than 1%. c. Mercuric chloride, HgCl2, when used as the preservative, interferes when the chloride levels are low (less than 50 mg/L). This interference is overcome by spiking samples with a minimum of 50 mg/L of sodium chloride. PHOSPHATE, ppb SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 080 Phosphate ppb) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 080 Phosphate ppb from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1.0 mL of *Phosphate Acid Reagent (V-6282). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one measure of *Phosphate Reducing Reagent (V-6283). Cap and shake until powder dissolves. Wait 5 minutes for full color development. Solution will turn blue if phosphates are present. 9. At end of 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHATE, ppb Test Procedures PHOSPHATE, ppb SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHORUS, TOTAL - LOW RANGE ASCORBIC ACID REDUCTION WITH PERSULFATE DIGESTION METHOD • CODE 4024-01 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 25 *Total Phosphorus Acid Reagent Tubes *4035-G 5g *Digestion Reagent Powder *4036-C 2 X 30 mL *Total Phosphorus LR Hydroxide Reagent *4038-G 2 X 30 mL *Phosphate Acid Reagent *V-6282-G 5g Phosphate Reducing Reagent V-6283-C 1 Spoon, 0.15 g, plastic 0727 3 Pipets, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 2 Funnels, plastic 0459 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Equipment needed but not supplied: 1 COD Adapter 5-0087 1 COD Reactor, 12 tubes, 120V 5-0102 or 1 COD Reactor, 12 tubes, 230V 5-0102-EX2 Optional Equipment: 1 Volumetric pipet, 5.0 mL 2-2174 2 Volumetric pipets, 1.0 mL 2-2170 1 Pipet Bulb 2-2164 1 Wipes 2-2069 1 Test Tube Holder 2-2190 SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHORUS, Total, Low Range Test Procedures NOTE: For greater accuracy, use laboratory grade pipets. Test Procedures Phosphorus in natural waters and wastewaters occurs almost exclusively in the form of orthophosphates, condensed phosphates (pyro-, meta- and other polyphosphates) and organically bound phosphates. Phosphates may be added in small amounts to water supplies during treatment. Larger amounts are introduced to water used for cleaning or laundering as components of commercial cleaning preparations. Phosphates are used to treat boiler water and are components of agricultural and residential fertilizers. Phosphorus is an important nutrient for aquatic plants. The amount found in natural water is generally not more than 0.1 mg/L unless the water has become polluted from wastewater sources or excessive drainage from agricultural areas. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial waste water. RANGE: 0.00 –3.50 mg/L Total Phosphorus as Phosphate MDL: 0.50 mg/L METHOD: Pretreatment of the sample with heat and acid provides conditions for the hydrolysis of condensed inorganic phosphates. Heat, acid and persulfate convert the organic phosphates to orthophosphate during the digestion. Ammonium molybdate and antimony potassium tartrate react in a filtered acid medium with dilute solutions of phosphate to form an antimonyphosphomolybdate complex. This complex is reduced to an intense blue colored complex by ascorbic acid. The color is proportional to the amount of phosphate present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Rinse sample bottle with 1:1 hydrochloric acid followed by deionized water. Do not use phosphate detergents. If the sample can not be analyzed immediately, the sample should be preserved by adjusting the pH to 2 or less with concentrated sulfuric acid and refrigerated at 4°C. Warm the sample to room temperature and neutralize with 5.0 N sodium hydroxide before analyzing. INTERFERENCES: Large amounts of turbidity may interfere. Aluminum (200 ppm), Arsenate (any level), Chromium (100 ppm), Copper (10 ppm), Iron (100 ppm), Nickel (300 ppm), Silica (50 ppm), Silicate (10 ppm), Sulfide (90 ppm) and Zinc (80 ppm) will interfere. PHOSPHORUS, Total, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Preheat COD reactor to 150 ±2°C. Follow safety precautions. 2. Remove cap from a *Total Phosphorus Acid Reagent Tube (4035). Use a 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 5.0 mL of sample. 3. Use the 0.15 g spoon (0727) and a funnel (0459) to add one level measure of *Digestion Reagent Powder (4036). Tap funnel to dispense powder completely. Cap tube tightly and shake until powder completely dissolves. 4. Place the tube in the COD reactor for 30 minutes. 5. At the end of the heating period, turn the reactor off. Carefully remove the tube from the reactor and allow it to cool to room temperature. 6. At the end of the cooling period, press and hold turns on. 7. Press ENTER until colorimeter to select TESTING MENU. 8. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 081 Phosphate T LR) from TESTING MENU. 9. Scroll to and select 081 Phosphate T LR from the menu. 11. Wipe the tube with a damp towel to remove fingerprints and smudges. Wipe with a dry towel. 12. Insert the tube into the chamber. Select SCAN BLANK. Remove the tube from the colorimeter. 13. Use another 1 mL pipet (0354) to add *1.0 mL of Phosphate Acid Reagent (V-6282). Cap and invert tube to mix. 14. Use the 0.1g spoon (0699) and a funnel (0459) to add one level spoon of Phosphate Reducing Reagent (V-6283). Tap funnel to dispense powder completely. Cap tube and shake until powder dissolves. 15. Wait 5 minutes. 16. Wipe the vials with a damp towel to remove fingerprints and smudges. Wipe with a dry towel. 17. Insert the tube into the chamber. Select SCAN SAMPLE. Record the result as Total Phosphorus in mg/L PO4. 18. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTES: For greater accuracy, use laboratory grade pipets. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHORUS, Total, Low Range Test Procedures 10. Carefully remove the cap from the digested tube. Use another 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 1.0 mL of *Total Phosphorus LR Hydroxide Reagent (4038) to the tube. Cap and invert to mix. Test Procedures PHOSPHORUS, Total, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHORUS, TOTAL – HIGH RANGE MOLYBDOVANADATE METHOD WITH ACID PERSULFATE DIGESTION • CODE 4025-01 QUANTITY 25 60 mL CONTENTS CODE *Total Phosphorus Acid Reagent Tubes Deionized Water *4035-G 5115PS-H 5g *Digestion Reagent Powder *4036- C 2 X 30 mL *Total Phosphorus HR Hydroxide Reagent *4037-G 30 mL *Total Phosphorus HR Indicator Reagent *4039-G 1 Spoon, 0.15 g 0727 3 Pipets 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 1 Pipet, 0.5 mL 0353 1 Funnel, plastic 0459 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Equipment needed but not supplied: 1 COD Adapter 5-0087 1 COD Reactor, 12 vial, 120V 5-0102 Or 1 COD Reactor, 12 vial, 23V 5-0102-EX2 Or 1 COD Reactor, 25 vial, 115V/230V 5-0094 Optional Equipment: 1 Volumetric pipet, 2.0 mL 2-2168 2 Volumetric pipet, 5.0 mL 2-2174 1 Volumetric pipet, 0.5 mL 30503 1 Pipet Bulb 2-2164 1 Wipes 2-2069 1 Test Tube Holder 2-2190 SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHORUS, Total, High Range Test Procedures NOTE: For greater accuracy, use laboratory grade pipets. Test Procedures Phosphorus in natural waters and wastewaters occurs almost exclusively in the form of orthophosphates, condensed phosphates (pyro-, meta- and other polyphosphates) and organically bound phosphates. Phosphates may be added in small amounts to water supplies during treatment. Larger amounts are introduced to water used for cleaning or laundering, as components of commercial cleaning preparations. Phosphates are used to treat boiler water and are components of agricultural and residential fertilizers. Phosphorus is an important nutrient for aquatic plants. The amount found in natural water is generally not more than 0.1 mg/L unless the water has become polluted from wastewater sources or excessive drainage from agricultural areas. APPLICATION: Boiler, cooling, and industrial water. RANGE: 0.0–70 mg/L Total Phosphorus as phosphate MDL: 5 mg/L METHOD: Pretreatment of the sample with heat and acid provides conditions for the hydrolysis of condensed inorganic phosphates. Heat, acid and persulfate convert the organic phosphates to orthophosphate during digestion. Orthophosphate reacts in acidic conditions with ammonium vanadomolybdate to form vanadomolybdophosphoric acid. The resulting yellow color is proportional to the concentration of orthophosphate. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Rinse sample bottle with 1:1 hydrochloric acid followed by deionized water. Do not use phosphate detergents. If the sample can not be analyzed immediately, the sample should be preserved by adjusting the pH to 2 or less with concentrated sulfuric acid and refrigerated at 4°C. Warm the sample to room temperature and neutralize with 5.0 N sodium hydroxide before analyzing. INTERFERENCES: Large amounts of turbidity may interfere. Silica and arsenate interfere only if the sample is heated. Arsenite, fluoride, thorium, bismuth, molybdate, thiosulfate, and thiocyanate cause negative interference. Ferrous iron concentrations above 100 ppm will interfere. PHOSPHORUS, Total, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE Use COD/UDV adapter. 1. Preheat COD reactor to 150 ±2°C. Follow safety precautions. 2. Remove cap from a *Total Phosphorus Acid Reagent Tube (4035). Use a 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 5.0 mL of Deionized Water (5115PS). This is the blank. 3. Remove cap from a *Total Phosphorus Acid Reagent Tube (4035). Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 5.0 mL of sample water. This is the sample. 4. Use the 0.15 g spoon (0727) and a funnel (0459) to add one level measure of *Digestion Reagent Powder (4036) to each tube. Tap funnel to dispense powder completely. Cap tube tightly and shake until powder dissolves completely. 5. Place the tubes in the COD reactor for 30 minutes. 6. At the end of the heating period, turn the reactor off. Carefully remove the tubes from the reactor block and allow them to cool to room temperature. 7. Carefully remove the caps from the digested tubes. Use another 1 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of *Total Phosphorus HR Hydroxide Reagent (4037) to each tube. Cap and invert to mix. 9. During the waiting period, press and hold 10. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 11. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 082 Phosphate T HR) from TESTING MENU. 12. Scroll to and select 082 Phosphate T HR from the menu. 13. Wipe the tubes with a damp towel to remove fingerprints and smudges. Wipe with a dry towel. 14. Insert the blank tube into the chamber. Select SCAN BLANK. Remove the blank tube from the colorimeter. 15. Insert the sample tube into the chamber. Select SCAN SAMPLE. Record the result as Total Phosphorus in mg/L PO4. 16. Press to turn the colorimeter off or press menu or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous NOTE: For greater accuracy, use laboratory grade pipets. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PHOSPHORUS, Total, High Range Test Procedures 8. Use the 0.5 mL pipet (0353) to add 0.5 mL *Total Phosphorus HR Indicator Reagent (4039) to each tube. Cap and invert to mix. Wait 7 minutes. Test Procedures PHOSPHORUS, Total, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 POTASSIUM TETRAPHENYLBORON METHOD • CODE 3639-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Sodium Hydroxide, 1.0N *4004WT-G 5g *Tetraphenylboron Powder *6364-C 1 Spoon, 0.05 g, plastic 0696 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Potassium, as the seventh most common element on the Earth, may be found in minor quantities in most water supplies. It seldom exceeds 10 ppm in drinking water and usually is less than 2 ppm. In some brine or runoff in agricultural areas the potassium concentration may reach 100 ppm. Drinking, surface, and saline water. RANGE: 0.0–10.0 ppm Potassium MDL: 0.8 ppm METHOD: Potassium reacts with sodium tetraphenylborate to form a colloidal white precipitate in quantities proportional to the potassium concentration. SAMPLE HANDLING Store samples in polyethylene bottles, not in soft glass & PRESERVATION: where leaching of potassium from the glass may occur. Samples may be acidified to pH 2 with nitric acid, but should be neutralized before analyzing. INTERFERENCE: Calcium and magnesium interfere at very high concentrations. Check for stray light interference (see p. 69). SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 POTASSIUM Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 083 Potassium) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 083 Potassium from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add 4 drops of *Sodium Hydroxide, 1.0N (4004WT). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 0.05 g spoon (0696) to add one measure of *Tetraphenylboron Powder (6364). Cap and shake vigorously until all of the powder has dissolved. Wait 5 minutes. 9. At end of 5 minute waiting period, mix tube again to suspend any settled precipitate. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. For the most accurate results, the sample and reagents should be at 25±4°C. POTASSIUM SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 SILICA – LOW RANGE HETEROPOLY BLUE METHOD • CODE 3664-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Silica Reagent #1 *V-4466-G 30 mL *Silica Reagent #2 *V-4467-G 30 mL *Silica Reagent #3 *V-4468-G 10 g *Silica Reagent #4 *V-6284-D 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. The presence of silica is particularly objectionable in water used for boiler feed water purposes, as it may cause the formation of a hard, dense scale which has unusually high resistance to heat transfer. Serious loss of turbine efficiency results from insoluble silica turbine blade deposits caused by vaporization of silica from boiler water. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SILICA, Low Range Test Procedures Silicon dioxide, SiO2, commonly known as silica, occurs in all natural water. Silica may be present as suspended, insoluble particles in a colloidal or polymeric state. It may also be present in a reactive form as silicic acid or silicate ions. Silica is a major nutrient for diatoms. A silica cycle occurs in many bodies of water containing organisms, such as diatoms, that use silica in their skeletal structure. The silica removed from the water may be slowly returned to solution by the decomposition of the dead organisms. The major source of silica in natural water is from the decomposition of silicate minerals in the drainage basin from which the waters flow. Drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.0–4.0 ppm Silica MDL: 0.05 ppm METHOD: Reactive silica forms a complex with ammonium molybdate in an acidic solution to produce a yellowgreen color in proportion to the amount of silica present. Phosphate also reacts with molybdate but the addition of oxalic acid eliminates the molybdophosphoric acid complex. This silica molybdate complex is then reduced by ascorbic acid to produce an intense blue color. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Silica samples may be preserved by refrigeration at 4°C in plastic containers up to one week without any change in silica concentration. INTERFERENCES: Sulfides and large amounts of iron interfere. Color and turbidity may be removed by standardizing the instrument with the original water sample. Since silica is a component of glass waste and a common contaminant, it is suggested to run a reagent blank using silica-free water. The blank value is subtracted from the sample concentrations. Test Procedures APPLICATION: SILICA, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 085 Silica LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 085 Silica LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. (See Note) 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add 6 drops *Silica Reagent #1 (V-4466). Cap and invert to mix. 8. Add 12 drops of *Silica Reagent #2 (V-4467). Cap and mix. Wait 5 minutes. 9. Add 8 drops of *Silica Reagent #3 (V-4468). Cap and mix. Wait 2 minutes. 10. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one measure of *Silica Reagent #4 (V-6284). Cap and mix gently until powder has dissolved. Wait 5 minutes for full color development. 11. At end of 5 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents are obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SILICA, Low Range Test Procedures 12. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. Test Procedures SILICA, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SILICA – HIGH RANGE SILICOMOLYBDATE METHOD • CODE 3687-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Silica Reagent #1 *V-4466-G 30 mL *Silica Reagent #2 *V-4467-G 15 mL *Silica Reagent #3 *V-4468-G *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Silicon dioxide, SiO2, commonly known as silica, occurs in all natural water. Silica may be present as suspended, insoluble particles in a colloidal or polymeric state. It may also be present in a reactive form as silicic acid or silicate ions. Silica is a major nutrient for diatoms. A silica cycle occurs in many bodies of water containing organisms, such as diatoms, that use silica in their skeletal structure. The silica removed from the water may be slowly returned to solution by the decomposition of the dead organisms. The major source of silica in natural water is from the decomposition of silicate minerals in the drainage basin from which the waters flow. APPLICATION: Boilers and cooling towers; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0–75 ppm Silica MDL: 0.5 ppm METHOD: Silica forms a complex with ammonium molybdate in an acidic solution to produce a yellow color in proportion to the amount of silica present. Phosphate also reacts with molybdate but the addition of oxalic acid eliminates the molybdophosphoric acid complex. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Silica samples may be preserved by refrigeration at 4°C in plastic containers up to one week without any change in silica concentration. INTERFERENCES: Sulfides and large amounts of iron interfere. Color and turbidity may be removed by standardizing the instrument with the original water sample. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SILICA, High Range Test Procedures The presence of silica is particularly objectionable in water used for boiler feed water purposes, as it may cause the formation of a hard, dense scale which has unusually high resistance to heat transfer. Serious loss of turbine efficiency results from insoluble silica turbine blade deposits caused by vaporization of silica from boiler water. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 086 Silica HR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 086 Silica HR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Add 6 drops *Silica Reagent #1 (V-4466). Cap and invert to mix. 8. Add 12 drops of *Silica Reagent #2 (V-4467). Cap and mix. Wait 5 minutes. 9. At end of 5 minute waiting period, add 8 drops of *Silica Reagent #3 (V-4468). Cap and mix. 10. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: To extend the range to 100 ppm, perform a 2:1 dilution of water sample, with silica-free water. Perform test and multiply result by 2. SILICA, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SULFATE – HIGH RANGE BARIUM CHLORIDE METHOD • CODE 3665-SC QUANTITY 10 g CONTENTS *Sulfate Reagent 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic CODE *V-6277-D 0699 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters, domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0–100 ppm Sulfate MDL: 3 ppm METHOD: Sulfate ion is precipitated in an acid medium with barium chloride to form a barium sulfate suspension in proportion to the amount of sulfate present. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Sulfate samples may be preserved by refrigeration at 4°C up to 7 days in glass or plastic containers without any change in concentration. INTERFERENCE: Suspended matter and color interference may be removed by a filtration step. Silica in excess of 500 mg/L will interfere. Check for stray light interference (see page 69). SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SULFATE, High Range Test Procedures The most common mineral forms of sulfur are iron sulfide, lead sulfide, zinc sulfide and as calcium sulfate and magnesium sulfate. In most fresh waters the sulfate ion is the second or third most abundant anion, being exceeded only by bicarbonate and, in some cases, silicate. Sulfur, in the form of sulfate, is considered an important nutrient element. Mineral springs are rich in sulfate and feed appreciable quantities of this compound to the watershed. Acid mine water drainage is a form of pollution which may contribute extremely large amounts of sulfate content to natural waters. Other sources of sulfate include waste material from pulp mills, steel mills, food processing operations and municipal wastes. Many bacteria obtain sulfur from sulfate for the synthesis of amino acids. In lakes and streams low in oxygen, this process of sulfate reduction causes the production of hydrogen sulfide, with its characteristic offensive odor. Calcium sulfate and magnesium sulfate contribute significantly to the hardness of water. Under natural conditions, the quantities ordinarily to be expected in lakes are between 3 and 30 parts per million. PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 089 Sulfate HR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 089 Sulfate HR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one measure of *Sulfate Reagent (V-6277). Cap and shake until powder dissolves. A white precipitate will develop if sulfates are present. Wait 5 minutes. 8. Mix tube again. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: If the sulfate concentration of the test sample is greater than 100 ppm, it is recommended that a dilution be made with deionized water and the results multiplied by the dilution factor. A white film is deposited on the inside of test tubes as a result of the sulfate test. Thoroughly clean and rinse test tubes after each test. For the most accurate results, samples and reactions should be at 25±4°C. SULFATE, High Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SULFIDE – LOW RANGE METHYLENE BLUE METHOD • CODE 3654-02-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 2 x 30 *Sulfide Reagent A *V-4458-G 15 mL *Sulfide Reagent B *V-4459-E 2 x 60 mL Sulfide Reagent C 4460-H 2 Pipets, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SULFIDE, Low Range Test Procedures Sulfide occurs in many well water supplies and sometimes is formed in lakes or surface waters. In distribution systems, it may be formed as a result of bacterial action on organic matter under anaerobic conditions. It may also be found in waters receiving sewage or industrial wastes. Lake muds rich in sulfates produce hydrogen sulfide during periods of very low oxygen levels that result from stagnation. Concentrations of a few hundredths of a part per million (or milligram per liter) cause a noticeable odor. At low concentrations, this odor is described as “musty”; at high concentration, as “rotten eggs.” Removal of sulfide odor is accomplished by aeration or chlorination. Hydrogen sulfide, a toxic substance, acts as a respiratory depressant in both humans and fish. APPLICATION: Drinking, surface and saline waters; domestic and industrial wastes. RANGE: 0.00–1.50 ppm Sulfide MDL: 0.06 ppm METHOD: Under suitable conditions the sulfide ion reacts with p-aminodimethylaniline and ferric chloride to produce methylene blue in proportion to the sulfide concentration. Ammonium phosphate is added to remove the color due to the ferric iron. SAMPLE HANDLING Samples must be taken with a minimum of aeration & PRESERVATION: since sulfide is volatilized by aeration and any oxygen which is taken up will destroy sulfides by chemical action. Samples that are used for total sulfide concentrations may be preserved by adding 2M zinc acetate solution at a dosage of 2 mL per liter of sample. This precipitates sulfide as inert zinc sulfide. Determination of dissolved sulfides in samples not preserved with zinc acetate must be started within 3 minutes of sampling. Test Procedures INTERFERENCES: SULFIDE, Low Range Strong reducing agents such as sulfite, thiosulfate, and hydrosulfite prevent the formation of the color or diminish its intensity. High concentrations of sulfide will inhibit the reaction, but dilution of the sample prior to analysis eliminates this problem. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 090 Sulfide LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 090 Sulfide LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 1.0 mL of *Sulfide Reagent A (V-4458). Cap and mix. 8. Add 6 drops of Sulfide Reagent B (V-4459). Cap and mix. Wait 1 minute. Solution will turn blue if sulfides are present. 9. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of Sulfide Reagent C (4460). Cap and mix. Color development is immediate and stable. 10. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures 11. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. SULFIDE, Low Range Test Procedures SULFIDE, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 SURFACTANTS ION PAIR EXTRACTION–BROMPHENOL BLUE INDICATOR METHOD • CODE 4876-01 QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 50 g pH Adjustment Powder 4509- H 10 g Sodium Chloride Reagent 4877-D 2 X 60 mL *DS Indicator Reagent *4508-H 1 Spoon, 0.5 g, plastic 0698 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Aqueous waste from households and industrial laundering operations is the main source of surfactants in waters. Surfactants are found in low concentrations in natural water except in areas of an outfall or other point source. Surface water, wastewater. RANGE: 0.0–8.0 ppm as Linear Alkyl Sulfonates (LAS) MDL: 0.75 METHOD: The presence of LAS in the water sample causes the transfer of bromphenol blue dye from the organic reagent layer to the aqueous layer. The amount of color in the aqueous layer is proportional to the concentration of the LAS in the sample. LAS are Methylene Blue Active Substances (MBAS). This calibration is based on sodium lauryl sulfate (dodecyl sodium sulfate). Some linear alkyl sulfonates may have a slightly different response. Prepare standards of a known concentration and follow the test procedure below to determine a conversion factor. SAMPLE HANDLING Analyze samples as soon as possible. May be stored & PRESERVATION: at 4°C for 24 hours. Warm to room temperature before testing. INTERFERENCES: Cationic surfactants and nonionic surfactants. SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 SURFACTANTS Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 094 Surfactants) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 094 Surfactants from menu. 5. Rinse a tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert the tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove the tube from colorimeter. 8. Use the 0.5 g spoon (0698) to add 0.5 g pH Adjustment Powder (4509). Cap and mix until powder dissolves. 9. Use the 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add two measures of Sodium Chloride Reagent (4877). Cap and mix until powder disintegrates. 10. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of *DS Indicator (4508). 11. Cap and shake for 1 minute. Test Procedures 12. Wait 5 minutes. DO NOT MIX. Tap vials to remove reagent from the sides of the tube. 13. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result in ppm LAS. 14. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SURFACTANTS SMART3 Test Procedures 2.11 TANNIN TUNGSTO-MOLYBDOPHOSPHORIC ACID METHOD CODE 3666-01-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Tannin Reagent #1 *7833-G 2 x 60 mL *Tannin Reagent #2 *7834-H 1 Pipet, plain, plastic 0352 1 Pipet, 1.0 mL, plastic 0354 *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. Tannin and lignin are examples of hydroxylated aromatic compounds found in discharge wastewater from paper mills, in some boiler water treatment, in natural brackish water, and in wastewater from leather tanning plants. The taste and odor of these compounds is generally offensive so that their control is important in many areas. Industrial wastewater, boiler water, and natural water. RANGE: 0.0–10.0 ppm Tannic Acid MDL: 0.1 ppm METHOD: The hydroxylated aromatic compounds will reduce a mixture of tungstophosphoric and molybdophosphoric acids to form a blue color in proportion to the concentration of aromatic hydroxyl groups. SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Sample should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection. INTERFERENCES: Other reducing compounds such as ferrous iron and sulfites. Results may be expressed as tannin like compounds, or aromatic hydroxy compounds. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 TANNIN Test Procedures APPLICATION: PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 096 Tannin) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 096 Tannin from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use the plain pipet (0352) to add 4 drops of *Tannin Reagent #1 (7833). Cap and mix. 8. Use the 1.0 mL pipet (0354) to add 2.0 mL of *Tannin Reagent #2 (7834). Cap and mix. Wait 30 minutes for full color development. 9. At end of 30 minute waiting period, mix, insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Test Procedures 10. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTES: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. For the most accurate results, the sample and reagents should be at 20 ±2°C. TANNIN SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 TURBIDITY ABSORPTION METHOD • NO REAGENTS REQUIRED Turbidity is a measure of water clarity and is independent of color. Turbidity is caused by undissolved and suspended solids. Mud, silt, algae, and microorganisms can all cause turbidity. Turbidity is a gross measurement of water quality. APPLICATION: Surface and industrial water for non-compliance monitoring. (For compliance monitoring at low turbidity levels, use a commercial nephelometer.) RANGE: 0–500 FAU (Formazon Attenuation Units) MDL: 3 FAU METHOD: Absorptimetric, 180° detector SAMPLE HANDLING & PRESERVATION: Measure sample as soon as possible after collection. INTERFERENCES: Check for stray light interference (see page 69). Test Procedures SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 TURBIDITY PROCEDURE 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 098 Turbidity) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 098 Turbidity from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with deionized water (turbidity free). Fill to the 10 mL line with deionized water. 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. 7. Rinse a second clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. Cap tube. Wipe off excess water and fingerprints. Shake to resuspend particulate matter. Remove all bubbles before measurement. 8. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. Turbidity measurements should be taken as soon as possible after sample has been collected. 9. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu Test Procedures NOTE: For the most accurate results, the sample should be at 25±4°C. PREPARING FORMAZIN SOLUTIONS The turbidity calibration was prepared by using standard formazin solutions as a reference. These solutions can be prepared by carefully following the procedure below.† 1. Dissolve 1.000 g of Hydrazine Sulfate in deionized water and dilute to mark in 100 mL volumetric flask. 2. Dissolve 10.00 g of Hexamethylenetetramine in deionized water and dilute to mark in 100 mL volumetric flask. 3. Mix 5 mL of each solution in a 100 mL volumetric flask and allow to set undisturbed for 24 hours. 4. At the end of the waiting period, dilute to mark with deionized water and mix. 5. The turbidity of the stock solution is 400 FTU. The stock solution is stable for one month. Dilutions from the stock should be prepared fresh daily. †Alternatively, a prepared concentrated formazin standard of 4000 NTU may be ordered in a 60 mL size by Code 6195-H. TURBIDITY SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 ZINC – LOW RANGE ZINCON METHOD • CODE 3667-SC QUANTITY CONTENTS CODE 30 mL *Zinc Indicator Solution *6314-G 120 mL *Methyl Alcohol *6319-J 10 g Sodium Ascorbate Powder 6316-D 25 g *Zinc Buffer Powder *6315-G 15 mL *Sodium Cyanide, 10% *6565-E 30 mL *Formaldehyde Solution, 37% *5128-G 1 “Dilute Zinc Indicator Solution” Bottle, w/1 pipet assembly 0128-MT 1 Graduated Cylinder, 10 mL, glass 0416 1 Spoon, 0.5 g, plastic 0698 2 Pipets, plain, plastic 0352 1 Spoon, 0.1 g, plastic 0699 Zinc enters the domestic water supply from the deterioration of galvanized iron and brass pipes, and from industrial wastes. Zinc is an essential element for body growth and development and is an important plant nutrient. Concentrations of zinc above 5.0 mg/L in drinking water can cause a bitter astringent taste. In the U.S., zinc concentrations may vary between 0.06 to 7.0 mg/L, with an average value of 1.33 mg/L. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 ZINC, Low Range Test Procedures *WARNING: Reagents marked with an * are considered to be potential health hazards. To view or print a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for these reagents go to www.lamotte.com. To obtain a printed copy, contact LaMotte by e-mail, phone or fax. APPLICATION: Drinking and surface waters, domestic and industrial waste water. RANGE: 0.00–3.00 ppm Zinc MDL: 0.05 ppm METHOD: Zinc forms a blue colored complex with Zincon in a solution buffered at pH 9.0. Other heavy metals are complexed by cyanide and the zinc cyanide complex is released by the addition of formaldehyde before the other metal cyanide complexes are destroyed. Sodium ascorbate is added to reduce the interference of manganese. SAMPLE HANDLING Sample should be analyzed within 6 hours after & PRESERVATION: collection. The addition of hydrochloric acid will help preserve the metal ion content, however the acid should be neutralized before analysis. Test Procedures INTERFERENCES: ZINC, Low Range The following ions interfere in concentrations greater than those listed. Ion mg/L Ion mg/L Cd(II) 1 Cr(III) 10 Al (III) 5 Ni(II) 20 Mn (II) 5 Co (II) 30 Fe (III) 7 CrO4(II) 50 Fe (II) 9 SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 PROCEDURE A. PREPARATION OF DILUTE ZINC INDICATOR SOLUTION 1. Use a pipet (0352) to measure exactly 5.0 mL of *Zinc Indicator Solution (6314) into 10 mL graduated cylinder (0416). The bottom of the curved surface (the meniscus) of liquid should be at 5.0 mL mark. Pour this into the bottle labeled “Dilute Zinc Indicator Solution”. 2. Use unrinsed graduated cylinder to add 10.0 mL and then 7.8 mL (total of 17.8 mL) of *Methyl Alcohol (6319) to bottle labeled “Dilute Zinc Indicator Solution”. Cap and mix ingredients in this bottle. Do not leave this bottle uncapped. B. DETERMINATION OF ZINC 1. Press and hold 2. Press ENTER until colorimeter turns on. to select TESTING MENU. 3. Select ALL TESTS (or another sequence containing 099 Zinc LR) from TESTING MENU. 4. Scroll to and select 099 Zinc LR from menu. 5. Rinse a clean tube (0290) with sample water. Fill to the 10 mL line with sample. 7. Remove tube from colorimeter. Use 0.1 g spoon (0699) to add one measure of Sodium Ascorbate Powder (6316). Use 0.5 g spoon (0698) to add one measure of *Zinc Buffer Powder (6315). Cap and shake vigorously for 1 minute. Some undissolved buffer may remain in the bottom of the tube. 8. Add 3 drops of *Sodium Cyanide, 10% (6565). Cap and mix. 9. Use the 1 mL pipet assembly to add 1 mL of “Dilute Zinc Indicator Solution”. Cap and mix. 10. Use a second plain pipet (0352) to add 4 drops of *Formaldehyde Solution, 37% (5128). Cap and mix by inverting 15 times. 11. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN SAMPLE. Record result. 12. Press to turn colorimeter off or press or make another menu selection. EXIT to exit to a previous menu NOTE: For best possible results, a reagent blank should be determined to account for any contribution to the test result by the reagent system. To determine the reagent blank, follow the above test procedure to scan a distilled or deionized water blank. Then follow the above procedure to perform the test on a distilled or deionized water sample. This test result is the reagent blank. Subtract the reagent blank from all subsequent test results of unknown samples. It is necessary to determine the reagent blank only when a new lot number of reagents is obtained. SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 ZINC, Low Range Test Procedures 6. Insert tube into chamber, close lid and select SCAN BLANK. (See Note) Test Procedures ZINC, Low Range SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 APPENDIX Ammonia in water occurs in two forms: toxic unionized ammonia (NH3) and the relatively non-toxic ionized form, ammonium ion (NH4+). This test method measures both forms as ammonia-nitrogen (NH3+–N) to give the total ammonianitrogen concentration in water. The actual proportion of each compound depends on temperature, salinity, and pH. A greater concentration of unionized ammonia is present when the pH value and salinity increase. 1. Consult the table below to find the percentage that corresponds to the temperature, pH, and salinity of the sample. 2. To express the test result as ppm Unionized Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3–N), multiply the total ammonia-nitrogen test result by the percentage from the table. 3. To express the test result as ppm Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3+–N), subtract the unionized ammonia-nitrogen determined in step 2 from the total ammonianitrogen. 10°C 15°C 20°C 25°C FW1 SW2 FW SW FW SW FW SW 7.0 0.19 — 0.27 — 0.40 — 0.55 — 7.1 0.23 — 0.34 — 0.50 — 0.70 — 7.2 0.29 — 0.43 — 0.63 — 0.88 — 7.3 0.37 — 0.54 — 0.79 — 1.10 — 7.4 0.47 — 0.68 — 0.99 — 1.38 — 7.5 0.59 0.459 0.85 0.665 1.24 0.963 1.73 1.39 7.6 0.74 0.577 1.07 0.836 1.56 1.21 2.17 1.75 7.7 0.92 0.726 1.35 1.05 1.96 1.52 2.72 2.19 7.8 1.16 0.912 1.69 1.32 2.45 1.90 3.39 2.74 7.9 1.46 1.15 2.12 1.66 3.06 2.39 4.24 3.43 8.0 1.83 1.44 2.65 2.07 3.83 2.98 5.28 4.28 8.1 2.29 1.80 3.32 2.60 4.77 3.73 6.55 5.32 8.2 2.86 2.26 4.14 3.25 5.94 4.65 8.11 6.61 8.3 3.58 2.83 5.16 4.06 7.36 5.78 10.00 8.18 8.4 4.46 3.54 6.41 5.05 9.09 7.17 12.27 10.10 8.5 5.55 4.41 7.98 6.28 11.18 8.87 14.97 12.40 Freshwater data from Trussel (1972). Seawater values from Bower and Bidwell (1978). Salinity for Seawater values = 34% at an ionic strength of 0.701m. 1 2 SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10 APPENDIX Appendix pH FOR EXAMPLE: If a fresh water sample at 20°C has a pH of 8.5 and the test result is 1.0 ppm as Total Ammonia-Nitrogen: 1. The percentage from the table is 11.18% (or 0.1118). 2. 1 ppm Total Ammonia-Nitrogen x 0.1118 = 0.1118 ppm Unionized AmmoniaNitrogen. 3. Total Ammonia-Nitrogen 1.0000 ppm Unionized Ammonia-Nitrogen - 0.1118 ppm Ionized Ammonia-Nitrogen 0.8882 ppm Appendix = APPENDIX SMART3 Test Procedures 11.10
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Author : rmyers Create Date : 2011:03:29 12:27:50-04:00 Modify Date : 2011:05:11 11:34:08-06:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Metadata Date : 2011:05:11 11:34:08-06:00 Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2 Format : application/pdf Title : SMART3-MN.indd Creator : rmyers Document ID : uuid:9649d807-4ec9-442d-8e64-9349a5da7ff0 Instance ID : uuid:ff408366-56d0-5242-bd8c-a829ab1ccd0a Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows) Page Count : 289EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools